Mini Paceman 2013 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 275
1 of 275

Summary of Content for Mini Paceman 2013 Owner's Manual PDF

OWNER'S MANUAL MINI COUNTRYMAN MINI PACEMAN

Contents A - Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Cooper Cooper S

Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper

Works

Congratulations on your new MINI This Owner's Manual should be considered a permanent part of this vehicle. It should stay with the vehicle when sold to provide the next owner with important operating, safety and mainte- nance information.

We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

2012 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English X/12, 11 12 500 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Contents

The fastest way to find information on a particu- lar topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 260.

4 Notes 7 Reporting safety defects

AT A GLANCE 9 10 Cockpit 16 Onboard computer 20 Letters and numbers 21 Voice activation system

CONTROLS 25 26 Opening and closing 38 Adjustments 46 Transporting children safely 50 Driving 60 Controls overview 71 Technology for driving comfort and safety 84 Lamps 88 Climate 93 Practical interior accessories

DRIVING TIPS 103 104 Things to remember when driving

NAVIGATION 117 118 Navigation system 120 Destination entry 129 Route guidance 137 What to do if

Entertainment 139 140 On/off and tone 143 Radio 151 CD player 153 External devices

COMMUNICATIONS 163 164 Hands-free device Bluetooth 174 Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth 187 Office 195 MINI Connected

MOBILITY 199 200 Refueling 203 Wheels and tires 214 Engine compartment 218 Maintenance 220 Care 224 Replacing components 236 Giving and receiving assistance

REFERENCE 243 244 Technical data 252 Short commands for the voice activation

system 260 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Notes

4

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual We have tried to make all the information in this Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.

Should you wish to sell your MINI at some time in the future, remember to hand over this Owner's Manual to the new owner; it is an important part of the vehicle.

Additional sources of information Should you have any other questions, your MINI dealer will be glad to advise you at any time.

You can find more information about the MINI, for example on its technology, on the Internet at www.MINI.com.

Symbols used Indicates precautions that must be fol- lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-

sibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.<

Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your

vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.<

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.<

< Marks the end of a specific item of informa- tion.

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.

{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rele- vant section of this Owner's Manual for

information on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle equipment The manufacturer of your MINI is the Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMW AG.

This Owner's Manual describes all models as well as all production, country and special equip- ment that is offered in the model range. Equip- ment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems. For equipment and models that are not described in this Owner's Manual, please see the supplementary Owner's Manuals that are provided.

Status of this Owner's Manual at time of printing The high level of safety and quality of the MINI vehicles is ensured through continuous develop- ment. In rare cases, there may be differences between the description and the vehicle.

For your safety

Maintenance and repair Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and high-performance

electronics, requires specially adapted mainte-

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Notes

5

nance and repair methods. Therefore, have the necessary work on your MINI only carried out by a MINI dealer or a workshop that has specially trained personnel working in accordance with the specifications of the MINI manufacturer. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<

Parts and accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by the manu-

facturer of the MINI.

When you purchase accessories tested and approved by the manufacturer of the MINI and Original MINI Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by the manufacturer of the MINI to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle.

The manufacturer of the MINI warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship.

The manufacturer of the MINI will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by the man- ufacturer of the MINI.

The manufacturer of the MINI cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a MINI safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occu- pants.

Original MINI Parts, MINI Accessories and other products approved by the manufacturer of the MINI, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all MINI dealers.

Installation and operation of accessories that have not been approved by the manufacturer of your MINI, such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension compo- nents, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or similar acces-

sories, may cause extensive damage to the vehi- cle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the MINI Limited Warranty. See your MINI dealer for additional information.<

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems

may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.<

California Proposition 65 Warning California law requires us to issue the following warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts,

including components found in the interior fur- nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro- ductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.

Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.<

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.

Your MINI is covered by the following warran- ties:

> New Vehicle Limited Warranty

> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Notes

6

> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty

> California Emission Control System Limited Warranty

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con- ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehi- cle to meet different prevailing operating condi- tions and registration requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limita- tions or exclusions for such country or region. In such a case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehi- cle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for required maintenance mea- sures:

> MINI Maintenance System

> Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models

> Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov- ered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Data memory A variety of electronic components in your vehi- cle include data storage devices, which store technical information on the condition of your

vehicle, events and errors, either temporarily or permanently. In general, this technical informa- tion documents the condition of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings:

> Operating conditions of system compo- nents, e.g., fill levels.

> Status messages regarding the vehicle and of its individual components, such as wheel rpm/vehicle speed, response delay, lateral acceleration.

> Malfunctions and defects in the major sys- tem components, such as the lights and brakes.

> Responses of the vehicle in special driving situations, such as the deployment of an air- bag, the utilization of stability control sys- tems.

> Environmental conditions, such as tempera- ture.

These data are exclusively of a technical nature and are used for the detection and correction of errors, as well as the optimization of vehicle functions. Motion profiles of traveled routes can not be deduced from these data. If services are required, such as repair services, service pro- cesses, warranty claims and quality assurance, then this technical information can be read out by employees of service departments, including the manufacturer, from the event and error data storage devices by using special diagnostic equipment. There, if necessary, you will receive further information. After remedying an error, the information in the error memory is deleted or progressively overwritten.

When using the vehicle, situations are conceiv- able in which this technical data, in conjunction with other information, such as accident reports, vehicle damage, witness statements, etc. - pos- sibly with the assistance of an expert - could be traced to particular individuals. Additional func- tions that are agreed upon contractually with the customer, such as vehicle tracking in case of emergency, permit the transmission of certain vehicle data from the vehicle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Notes

7

Event data recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or crash-like situations such as an air bag deployment or collision with a road obstacle, data that will assist in under- standing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record data such as:

> How various systems in your vehicle were operating.

> Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened.

> How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

> How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under- standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving con- ditions and no personal data, e.g., name, gen- der, age, and crash location, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce- ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

Reading the data recorded by an EDR requires special equipment and access to the vehicle or the EDR. In addition to the vehicle manufac- turer, other parties that have the special equip- ment such as law enforcement, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers The following applies only to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safer- car.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele- phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Watch Me.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

NAVIGATION

Entertainment

COMMUNICATIONS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

10

Cockpit

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model

range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Around the steering wheel

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

11

1 Adjusting the exterior mirrors in and out 44

6 Ignition lock 50

7 Buttons on steering wheel, right

left side

8 Horn: the entire surface

9 Adjusting the steering wheel 45

10 Releasing the hood 215

Power windows, front 36

MINI Countryman: power windows, rear 36 MINI Countryman: safety switch for power windows in rear passenger compartment 37

2 Parking lamps 84

Low beams 84

Automatic headlamp control 84 Adaptive Light Control 85

Turn signals 55

High beams 86

Headlamp flasher 55

Roadside parking lamps 86

Computer 61

3 Tachometer 12

Instrument lighting 86

Resetting the trip odometer 60

4 Wiper system 55

5 Switching the ignition on/off and starting/stopping the engine 50

Resuming cruise control 58

Storing speed and accelerating or decelerating

Activating/deactivating cruise control 58

Increasing or reducing volume

Telephone

Press: accepting and ending a call, starting dialing of selected phone number and redialing if no phone number is selected

Microphone in the roofliner on the driver's side Activating/deactivating voice acti- vation system 21

Microphone in the roofliner on the driver's side

Changing the radio station Selecting a music track Scrolling through the redial list

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

12

Displays

1 Tachometer 60

with indicator and warning lamps 13

2 Display for

> Current vehicle speed 60

> Indicator and warning lamps 13

3 Resetting the trip odometer 60

4 Display for

> Position of automatic transmission 52

> Computer 61

> Date of next scheduled service, and remaining distance to be driven 64

> Odometer and trip odometer 60

> Settings and information 62

> Personal Profile settings 26

5 Instrument lighting 86

6 Speedometer

with indicator and warning lamps 13

7 Control Display 17

8 Fuel gauge 60

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

13

Indicator and warning lamps

The concept

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in var- ious combinations and colors in indicator area 1 or 2.

Some lamps will be tested for proper functioning when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on and will therefore light up briefly.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

You can call up more information, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, page 67.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.

Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps in display area 1 indicate certain functions:

High beams/headlamp flasher 86

Front fog lamps 86

Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC is regulating the drive forces in order to maintain driving stability 72

Parking brake applied 52

Engine malfunction with adverse effect on exhaust emissions 219

Cruise control 58

Turn signals 55

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE Cockpit

14

Around the center console

1 Hazard warning flashers

2 Speedometer 12

3 Radio/CD 143

4 Air conditioner or automatic climate control 88

Selecting waveband

Changing the audio source

Changing the radio station or track

Ejecting CD

Temperature

Recirculated-air mode

Air distribution for air conditioner

Air distribution to the windshield

Air distribution to the upper body area

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Cockpit AT A GLANCE

15

5 Switches in the center console

6 Storage compartment

7 Changing to a different menu on the Control Display 18

8 MINI joystick 16 Move in four directions, turn or press

9 USB audio interface 154

10 Accessing the main menu on the Control Display 17

Around the headliner

1 Indicator/warning lamp for front passenger airbags 82

Air distribution to the footwell

Automatic air distribution and flow rate

Maximum cooling

Cooling function

Defrosting windows

Rear window defroster

Windshield heating

Air flow rate

Seat heating 42

Central locking system, inside 30

Front fog lamps 86

Sport button 74

Driving stability control systems Dynamic Stability Control DSC 72 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 73

2 Reading lamps 87

Ambient lighting 87

Glass roof, electric 35

Interior lamps 87

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE Onboard computer

16

Onboard computer

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

The concept The onboard computer integrates the functions of a large number of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a single central position. The following section provides an introduction to basic menu navigation. The con- trol of the individual functions is described in connection with the relevant equipment.

Make entries only when traffic and road conditions permit; otherwise, you may

endanger vehicle occupants and other road users by being distracted.<

Overview of operating elements

Controls

1 Control Display

2 MINI joystick with buttons

Control Display

Notes > When cleaning the Control Display, follow

the care instructions.

> Do not place any objects in the area of the Control Display; otherwise, the Control Dis- play can be damaged.

Switching Control Display off/on 1. Move the MINI joystick to the right repeat-

edly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

2. "Switch off control display"

To switch on, press the MINI joystick.

MINI joystick with buttons Selecting menu items and carrying out settings.

1. Turning 1 and pressing 2.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Onboard computer AT A GLANCE

17

2. Tilting in four directions.

Buttons on MINI joystick

Operating principle As of radio readiness, the following message appears on the Control Display:

To hide the message: Press the MINI joystick. The main menu is displayed.

The message is automatically hidden after approx. 10 seconds.

Opening the main menu Press the button.

All functions of the onboard computer can be accessed via the main menu.

Selecting a menu item Menu items displayed in white can be selected.

1. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired menu item is highlighted.

2. Press the MINI joystick.

A new menu is displayed or the function is exe- cuted.

Using the button on the MINI joystick:

Press the button.

Each time that the button is pressed, the menu items of the main menu can be called up, one after another.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, the menu items that should be selected are depicted in quotation marks, e.g. "Settings".

Button Function

Accessing the main menu

Changing to another menu

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE Onboard computer

18

Changing between panels After selecting a menu item, e.g. "Radio", a new menu is displayed on a panel. The panels can overlap.

> Move the MINI joystick to the left.

Current panel is closed and the previous panel is displayed.

> Move the MINI joystick to the right.

The new panel is opened and placed on top.

Arrows pointing left or right indicate that addi- tional panels can be accessed.

View of a menu that has been called up In general, when a menu is called up, the panel that was last selected in the menu is displayed. To display the first panel of the menu:

Move the MINI joystick as often to the left as necessary until the first panel is displayed.

Opening the Options menu Move the MINI joystick to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

The following is displayed in the "Options" menu:

> Screen settings.

> Control options for the selected menu.

Adjusting settings 1. Select a field.

2. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set- ting is displayed.

3. Press the MINI joystick to confirm the set- ting.

Activating/deactivating functions Some menu items are preceded by a check box. It indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Example: setting the clock 1. Press the button.

The main menu is displayed.

2. Turn the MINI joystick until "Settings" is selected, and press the MINI joystick.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Onboard computer AT A GLANCE

19

3. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time/Date" is selected, and press the MINI joystick.

4. Turn the MINI joystick until "Time:" is selected, and press the MINI joystick.

5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and press the MINI joystick.

6. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes and press the MINI joystick.

Status information

1 Time

2 Telephone status

> Incoming, outgoing or missed call

> Roaming active

> Text message received

3 Reception strength of the wireless net- work, depends on the mobile phone

4 Display for:

> Entertainment: Radio, CD, external devices

> Telephone: Name of the mobile phone paired with the vehicle

5 Sound output is switched off or display for traffic bulletins:

> "TI": Traffic bulletins are switched on.

> No display: Traffic bulletins are switched off.

Other displays: Status information is temporarily hidden during Check Control message displays or entries via the voice activation system.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE Letters and numbers

20

Letters and numbers

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Entering letters and numbers 1. Turn the MINI joystick: select the letters or

numbers.

2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed.

3. "OK": confirm entry.

Switching between letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering letters and numbers:

Switching between uppercase and lowercase letters Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering uppercase letters and lower- case letters:

Wordmatch concept during navigation Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically.

Destination search: the entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle.

> The only letters offered for entering addresses are those for which data are avail- able.

> Town/city names can be entered with the spelling used in any of the languages avail- able on the Control Display.

Symbol Function

Press the MINI joystick: delete one letter or num- ber

Press and hold the MINI joystick: delete all let- ters or numbers

Enter a blank space

Symbol Function

Entering letters

Entering numbers

Symbol Function

Move the MINI joystick for- ward: to switch from upper- case letters to lowercase let- ters

Move the MINI joystick for- ward: to switch from lower- case letters to uppercase let- ters

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

21

Voice activation system

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

The concept > By using the voice activation system, most of

the functions that are displayed on the Con- trol Display can be operated via voice com- mands. The system supports the entry pro- cess by means of announcements.

> Functions that can only be used while the vehicle is not moving cannot be operated via the voice activation system.

> The system includes a special microphone in the roofliner on the driver's side.

Prerequisite So that voice commands can be identified, set a language on the Control Display that is sup- ported by the voice activation system.

To set the language, see page 69.

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Saying commands

Activating voice activation system 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal indicate that the voice activation system is ready to receive spoken commands.

2. Say the command. The command appears on the Control Dis- play.

This symbol is displayed on the Control Dis- play when you can enter additional commands. If no further commands are possible, continue by operating the item of equipment via the onboard computer.

{...} Say the specified commands word for word. {{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE Voice activation system

22

Terminating or canceling voice activation system Press the button on the steering wheel or

Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands.

The commands that are possible depend upon which menu is currently shown on the Control Display.

There are short commands for many functions.

Some list items, for example telephone book listings, can also be selected using the voice acti- vation system. In particular, say the list items exactly as they are displayed in the respective list.

Having the possible commands read aloud Having the possible commands read aloud:

For example if you have selected "CD" the sys- tem will read aloud the possible commands for operating the CD player.

Carrying out functions through short commands Main menu functions can be executed immedi- ately by short commands, almost regardless of which menu item is selected, e.g., {Vehicle sta- tus}.

List of voice activation system short commands, see page 252.

Help for the voice activation system Calling up Help:

Additional commands for Help:

> {Help with examples}: information about the current operating options and the most important commands for them are announced.

> {Help with voice activation}: information regarding the principles behind the voice activation system is announced.

Using alternative commands There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:

Opening the main menu

Example: playing a CD

Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken aloud; they can also be selected using the MINI joystick.

1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel

Via short commands The CD playback can also be started by a short command.

1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

3. {C D track } e.g. CD track 4.

{Cancel}

{Voice commands}

{Help}

{Radio} or {Radio on}

{Main menu}

3. {{C D and multimedia}}

4. {C D}

5. {C D track }

6. {Track }e.g. CD track 4.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Voice activation system AT A GLANCE

23

Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system uses the stan- dard dialog or a short version.

With the short version of the spoken dialog, a shortened version of the requests and responses of the voice activation system are played aloud.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select a setting:

> "Default"

> "Short"

Notes For voice commands, bear in mind the follow- ing:

> Do not use the voice activation system to ini- tiate an emergency call. In stressful situa- tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establish- ment of a telephone connection.

> Pronounce the commands and digits smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses. The same applies to spelling when entering a destina- tion for navigation.

> Always speak the commands in the lan- guage of the voice activation system.

> When selecting a radio station, use the stan- dard pronunciation of the station name

{Select station} e.g. WPLJ

> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof closed to prevent interference from outside noise.

> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Handle Me.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE

DRIVING TIPS

NAVIGATION

Entertainment

COMMUNICATIONS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Opening and closing

26

Opening and closing

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Keys/remote controls

Buttons on the remote control

1 Opening the tailgate

2 Unlocking

3 Locking

General information Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is recharged when it is in the igni- tion lock while the car is being driven. You should therefore use each remote control at least twice a year to maintain the charge status. In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, page 35.

If more than one remote control unit is used, the settings called up and implemented depend on which remote control is recognized when the car is unlocked, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

In addition, information about service require- ments is stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in the remote control, page 218.

New remote controls Your MINI dealer can supply new remote con- trols as additional units or as replacements in the event of loss.

Integrated key

Press button 1 to release the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

> Driver's door, page 29

Personal Profile

The concept The functions of your MINI can be set individu- ally. By means of Personal Profiles, most of these settings are stored for the remote control cur- rently in use. When you unlock the car, the remote control is recognized and the settings stored for it are called up and implemented.

This means that your settings will be activated for you, even if in the meantime your car was used by someone else with another remote con- trol and the corresponding settings.

Individual settings are stored for a maximum of three remote controls.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Opening and closing CONTROLS

27

Personal Profile settings For more information on specific settings, refer to the specified pages.

> Response of the central locking system when the car is being unlocked 27

> Automatic locking of the vehicle 30

> Triple turn signal activation 55

> Settings for the displays on the onboard computer, in the speedometer and in the tachometer:

> 12 h/24 h mode of the clock 66

> Date format 67

> Brightness of the Control Display 70

> Language on the Control Display 69

> Units of measure for fuel consumption, distance covered/remaining distances and temperature 64

> Light settings:

> Pathway lighting 85

> Daytime running lights 85

> Automatic climate control: activating/deac- tivating the AUTO program, setting the tem- perature, air volume and air distribution 90

> Entertainment:

> Audio volume 141

> Tone control 141

Central locking system

The concept The central locking system is ready for operation whenever the driver's door is closed.

The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:

> Doors

> Tailgate

> Fuel filler flap

Operating from outside > Via the remote control

> Using the door lock

> In cars with Comfort Access, via the door handles on the driver's and passenger's sides

The anti-theft system is also operated at the same time. It prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or door han- dles. The remote control can also be used to switch the welcome lamps, the interior light, and the ambient lighting on and off. The alarm sys- tem is also activated or deactivated, page 32.

Operating from inside Switch/button for central locking system, page 30.

In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the central locking system unlocks automatically. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte- rior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: from outside

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. Take

the key with you when you leave the vehicle so that the vehicle can be opened from the out- side.<

Using the remote control

Unlocking Press the button. The welcome lamps and interior lamps come on.

Unlocking mode You can also set which parts of the car are unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control in use.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Opening and closing

28

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. "Unlock button"

4. Select a menu item:

> "All doors" Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.

> "Driver's door only" Press the button once to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap. Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.

Convenient opening Press and hold the button. The power windows are opened and the glass roof is tilted.

Convenient closing is not possible by means of the remote control.<

Locking Press the button.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there is any person inside, because the

vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.<

Setting confirmation signals To have the vehicle confirm when it has been locked or unlocked.

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. "Flash when lock/unlock"

4. Press the MINI joystick.

Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehicle is switched on.

Switching on interior lamps While the car is locked: Press the button. You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages, etc.

Unlocking tailgate Press the button for approx. 1 second and then release it.

When it is opened, the tailgate swings out and up toward the rear. Make sure that

adequate clearance is available before opening. To prevent accidentally locking yourself out, do not place the key down in the cargo area. If the tailgate was locked before opening, it will be locked again after it is closed. Before and after each trip, check that the tail- gate has not been inadvertently unlocked.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Opening and closing CONTROLS

29

Malfunctions The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key.

If the car can no longer be locked with a remote control, the battery in the remote control is dis- charged. Use this remote control during an extended drive; this will recharge the battery, page 26.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:

FCC ID: LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS

Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

> This device must not cause harmful interfer- ence, and

> this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the

user's authority to operate this equipment.<

Using the door lock

You can set which parts of the car are unlocked, page 27.

Depending upon the equipment, it is possible that only the driver's side door is unlocked or locked using the door lock.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there is any person inside, because the

vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.<

Locking doors and tailgate together To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail- gate together:

> With the doors closed, press the interior cen- tral locking button, page 30, to lock the vehicle.

> Unlocking and opening the driver or passen- ger door, page 30.

Lock the vehicle.

> Lock the driver's door with the integrated key via the door lock, or

> press the safety lock button on the pas- senger's door and close the door from the outside.

Convenience operation With an alarm system or Comfort Access, the windows and glass roof can be operated via the door lock.

Opening/closing Hold the key in the position for unlocking or locking.

Watch during the closing process to make sure that no one gets trapped. Releasing

the key stops the operation.<

Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction, the driver's door can be unlocked or locked by turn- ing the integrated key in the door lock to the end positions.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Opening and closing

30

Opening and closing: from inside Operation via

> Switch in the center console

> Button in the driver's door or front passen- ger door:

The illustration shows the button in the MINI Paceman as an example.

The switch or the button locks or unlocks the doors and tailgate when the doors are closed, but the anti-theft system is not activated. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Unlocking and opening > Either unlock the doors together using the

switch or the buttons for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or

> pull on the door handle of either door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

Locking > Press the switch/button or

> press down the safety lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. Take

the key with you when you leave the vehicle so that the vehicle can be opened from the out- side.<

Automatic locking You can also set the situations in which the car locks. The setting is stored for the remote con- trol in use.

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. Select a menu item:

> "Lock if no door is opened" The central locking system automatically locks the vehicle after a short time if no door has been opened.

> "Lock after start. to drive" The central locking system locks the vehicle as soon as you begin to drive.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Opening and closing CONTROLS

31

Unlocking tailgate

Press the button in the driver's footwell.

Tailgate To avoid damage, make sure there is suf- ficient clearance before opening the tail-

gate.<

While driving, sharp objects or objects with edges may strike against the rear

window and damage the heating element for the rear window. Assure that there are no objects with sharp edges near the rear win- dow.<

Opening In some market-specific versions, the tail- gate cannot be unlocked using the remote

control unless the vehicle is unlocked first. Only drive with the tailgate fully closed; other- wise, the tail lamps will be obscured and driving safety will be compromised.<

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Press the top side of the MINI emblem, arrow, or

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second and then release it. The tailgate is unlocked.

Closing Make sure that the closing path of the tail- gate is clear; otherwise, injuries may

occur.<

Take the remote control with you and do not put it into the luggage compartment:

otherwise, the remote control can be locked in the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.<

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Opening and closing

32

The handle recesses on the interior trim panel of the tailgate make it easier to pull it down.

Alarm system

The concept The alarm system, when activated, reacts if:

> A door, the engine compartment lid or the tailgate is opened

> There is movement inside the car

> The car's inclination changes, for instance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing it away

> There is an interruption in the power supply from the battery

The alarm system briefly indicates unauthorized entry or tampering by means of:

> An acoustic alarm

> Switching on the hazard warning flashers

Arming and disarming

General information Whenever the car is locked or unlocked, the alarm system is armed or disarmed.

Door lock with armed alarm system Because of the design, unlocking the door lock may trigger the alarm in some countries.

To turn off the alarm, unlock the vehicle using the remote control or switch on the ignition.

Tailgate with armed alarm system Even when the alarm system is armed, you can open the tailgate by means of the button on the remote control. When you subsequently close the tailgate it is again locked and monitored.

Panic mode You can activate the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button for at least 2 seconds.

Switching off the alarm: Press any button.

Switching off an alarm > Unlock the car with the remote control.

> Insert the key fully into the ignition lock.

> In cars with Comfort Access, press the button on the door lock.

Display on the revolution counter When the system is armed, all LEDs pulse. After approx. 16 minutes one LED flashes.

> LEDs pulse or LED flashes: system is armed.

> One LED flashes at short intervals: Doors, the hood or the tailgate are not prop- erly closed. Even if these are not closed fully, the remaining items are deadlocked and the LEDs pulse after approx. 10 seconds for approx. 16 minutes. Afterwards, one LED flashes. The interior movement detector is not acti- vated.

> LEDs go out after the vehicle is unlocked: No attempt was made to tamper with the car.

> LEDs flash after unlocking until the key is inserted in the ignition, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: an attempt was made to tamper with the vehicle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Opening and closing CONTROLS

33

Tilt alarm sensor The vehicle's inclination is monitored. The alarm is triggered, for instance, if an attempt is made to steal the vehicle's wheels or tow it away.

Interior movement detector Before the interior movement detector can operate correctly, the windows and glass roof must be closed.

Avoiding false alarms The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement detector can be switched off together.

This prevents false alarms, e.g. in the following situations:

> In duplex garages

> When being transported on car-carrying trains, ferries or trailers

> If pets are to remain inside the car

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior movement detector Press the button on the remote control twice in succession.

LEDs flash in short succession for approx. 2 seconds. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement detector are switched off until the car is next unlocked and locked.

Comfort Access

The concept Access to the vehicle is possible without the use of the remote control. All you need to do is wear the remote control close to your body, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control within the immedi- ate vicinity or in the passenger compartment.

Comfort Access supports the following func- tions:

> Unlocking/locking the vehicle

> Convenient closing

> Unlocking the tailgate separately

> Starting the engine

Functional requirements > There are no external malfunction sources in

the vicinity.

> For locking, the remote control must be out- side of the vehicle.

> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked again until after approx. 2 seconds.

> The engine can only be started if the remote control is in the vehicle.

> The doors and tailgate must be closed to be able to operate the windows and glass roof.

Comparison to standard remote controls The indicated function can be operated by pressing the buttons or via Comfort Access.

Instructions on opening and closing are found starting on page 26.

If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing the windows or glass roof, the sys-

tem is checking whether a remote control is inside the vehicle. Repeat the opening or closing procedure, if necessary.<

Unlocking

Press button 1. Depending on the setting, refer to Unlocking mode on page 27, only the driver's door or the entire vehicle is unlocked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Opening and closing

34

Press the button again to lock the vehicle again.<

Convenient opening with the remote control, refer to page 28.

Locking Press button 1.

For Convenient closing, press and hold button 1.

In addition, the windows and the glass sunroof are closed.

Unlocking the tailgate separately Press the top side of the MINI emblem.

If the vehicle detects that a remote control has been accidentally left inside the

locked vehicle's cargo area after the tailgate is closed, the tailgate will reopen slightly. The haz- ard warning flashers flash and an acoustic signal sounds.<

Windows and glass roof, electric If the engine is switched off, you can still operate the windows and glass sunroof so long as a door or the tailgate has not been opened.

If the doors and tailgate are closed again and the remote control is located inside the vehicle, the windows and the glass sunroof can be operated again.

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock to be able to operate the windows or glass roof when the engine is switched off and the doors are open.

Switching on radio readiness Switch on radio readiness by pressing the Start/ Stop button, page 50.

Do not depress the brake or the clutch; otherwise, the engine will start.<

Starting the engine The engine can be started or the ignition can be switched on when a remote control is inside the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote control into the ignition lock, page 50.

Switching off the engine in cars with automatic transmission The engine can only be switched off when the selector lever is in position P, page 52. To switch the engine off when the selector lever is in position N, the remote control must be in the ignition lock.

Before driving a vehicle with automatic transmission into a car wash 1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.

2. Depress the brake.

3. Move the selector lever to position N.

4. Switch off the engine.

The vehicle can roll.

Malfunction Comfort Access may malfunction due to local radio waves.

If this happens, open or close the vehicle via the buttons on the remote control or using the inte- grated key. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock and start the engine.

Warning lamps The warning lamp lights up when an attempt is made to start the engine: the engine cannot be started. The remote

control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunc- tioning. Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert another remote control into the ignition lock.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Opening and closing CONTROLS

35

The warning lamp lights up when the engine is running: the remote control is no longer inside the vehicle. After the

engine is switched off, the engine can only be restarted within approx. 10 seconds.

The indicator lamp lights up and a mes- sage appears on the Control Display: replace the battery in the remote con-

trol.

Replacing the battery The remote control for Comfort Access contains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.

1. Remove the cover.

2. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac- ing up.

3. Press the cover on to close.

Take the old battery to a recycling center or to your MINI dealer.<

Glass roof, electric To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the glass roof and keep it in your

field of vision until it is shut. Take the key with you when you leave the car; otherwise, children could operate the roof and possibly injure themselves.<

Tilting > Press the switch backward to the resistance

point and hold it there. Both glass roofs are tilted. Releasing the switch stops the movement.

> With the ignition switched on, press the switch backward beyond the resistance point. Both closed roofs are tilted fully. Pressing again stops the movement.

Opening, closing With the ignition switched on and the glass sun- roof tilted, press the switch backward and hold it there. The front glass roof opens. The rear glass roof is closed. Releasing the switch stops the movement.

The glass roof can be closed in the same way by pressing the switch forward.

The front glass roof remains in a tilted position. The rear glass roof is tilted. Pressing on the switch again closes both roofs completely.

Convenience operation via door lock or Comfort Access, refer to page 28 and 34.

Roller sunblind The roller sunblind can be opened and closed independently of the glass roof.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Opening and closing

36

Following interruptions in electrical power supply After a power failure, there is a possibility that the glass roof can only be tilted. In this case, have the system initialized. The manufacturer of your MINI recommends that you have this work done by your MINI dealer.

Windows

General information To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the window and keep it in your

field of vision until it is shut. Take the remote control with you when you leave the car; otherwise, children could operate the electric windows and possibly injure them- selves.<

If, after a window is opened and closed several times in close succession, the win-

dow can only be closed and not opened, the sys- tem is overheated. Let the system cool for sev- eral minutes with the ignition switched on or the engine running.<

Opening, closing

Front window

To open:

> Press the switch to the resistance point. The window continues to open as long as the switch is held.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point. The window opens automatically in radio readiness mode or higher.

Push the switch again to stop the opening movement.

To close:

> Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window continues to close as long as the switch is held.

> Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically.

Pushing the switch again stops the operation.

MINI Countryman: rear window

To open:

> Press the switch to the resistance point. The window continues to open as long as the switch is held.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point. The window opens automatically in radio readiness mode or higher.

To close:

> Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window continues to close as long as the switch is held.

> Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically.

Pushing the switch again stops the operation.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Opening and closing CONTROLS

37

After switching off the ignition When the ignition is switched off, the windows can still be operated for approx. 1 minute as long as no door is opened.

Take the key with you when you leave the car; otherwise, children could operate the

electric windows and possibly injure them- selves.<

Pinch protection system If the closing force rises beyond a predefined threshold during closing, the system will stop moving the window prior to lowering it again slightly.

Even though there is the pinch protection system, always make sure that the win-

dow's travel path is clear; otherwise, the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as thin objects, and the win- dow would continue closing.

Do not install any accessories that might inter- fere with window movement. Otherwise, the pinch protection system could be impaired.<

Closing without pinch protection To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the window and make sure that

the closing area is unobstructed.<

If there is an external danger, or if ice on the win- dows, etc., prevents you from closing the win- dows normally, the window can be closed man- ually.

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch again past the resistance point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.

The window closes without pinch protec- tion.

MINI Countryman: safety switch

With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear windows from being opened or closed via the switches in the rear passenger area, by children, for example.

Press the button. The LED lights up when this safety feature is acti- vated.

Always press the safety switch when chil- dren ride in the rear, otherwise uncon-

trolled closing of the windows could lead to inju- ries.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Adjustments

38

Adjustments

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Sitting safely The ideal sitting position can make a vital contri- bution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con- junction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seated position has a major influence on your safety in the event of an acci- dent. To ensure that the safety systems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the follow- ing section.

For additional information on transporting chil- dren safely, refer to page 46.

Airbags Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always

grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being deployed. No one and nothing should come between the airbags and the seat occupant. Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Ensure that the front passenger is correctly seated, e.g. that no feet or legs are propped against the dashboard. Otherwise, leg injury could result if the front airbag suddenly deployed. Make sure that passengers keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not lean against the cover of the head airbag; otherwise injuries can occur when the airbags are deployed.<

Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circumstances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individ- uals. This effect is usually only temporary.

For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 81.

Head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-

erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Head restraints, refer to page 41.

Safety belt Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Number of safety belts Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow

infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low across the hips and does not press against the abdomen. The safety belt must not rest against the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over hard or fragile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt so that it is pulled taut across the lap and shoulder, fitting the body snugly without any twists. Otherwise, the belt could slide over the hips in the event of a frontal collision and injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing bulky cloth- ing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut; otherwise, its restraining effect could be impaired.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Adjustments CONTROLS

39

Safety belts, refer to page 42.

Seats

Note before adjusting Never attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could

respond with unexpected movement, and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident. On the front passenger seat as well, do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven; otherwise, there is a dan- ger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection nor- mally provided by the belt.<

Comply with the instructions on head restraint height on page 41 and on damaged safety belts on page 44.

Seat adjustment, front Observe the instructions on page 39 to ensure the best possible personal protec-

tion.<

Longitudinal direction Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat into the desired position, arrows 2. After releasing the lever, move the seat slightly forward or back so that it engages properly.

Height

Pull up or push down the lever repeatedly, arrows 1, until the desired height is reached.

Backrest MINI Countryman:

Pull lever, arrow 1, and apply weight to or remove weight from the backrest as needed.

MINI Paceman:

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off as necessary, arrows 2.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Adjustments

40

Lumbar support You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.

The upper hips and spinal column receive sup- plementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.

The illustration shows the MINI Countryman as an example.

Turn the wheel to increase or decrease the cur- vature.

MINI Paceman: getting in back

1. Pull up the lever on the seat backrest, arrow 1.

The backrest folds forward.

2. Move the seat forward by pushing on the backrest, arrow 2.

After getting in or out, revert to the original seat position, refer to the following section.

To facilitate entry into the rear seat, you might slide the safety belt backwards in the lower belt slide rail.

Return seat to original position The driver's seat has a mechanical memory function for the forward/back setting and the backrest adjustment.

1. Slide the seat to return to its starting posi- tion.

Do not fold the backrest up until the seat is in its previous position. Other-

wise, the seat will engage in its current posi- tion. In this case, adjust the longitudinal position manually, page 39.<

2. Fold the backrest back up to lock the seat.

When moving the seat backward, make sure that you do not cause personal injury

or property damage. Before driving off, engage the front seats and seat backrests. Otherwise, there is a risk of acci- dent due to unexpected movement.<

MINI Countryman: seat adjustment, rear Do not adjust rear seats while the vehicle is moving; otherwise, passengers could be

injured. Make sure that the locking devices of the rear seats engage properly. Otherwise the restrain- ing effect of the safety belts during an accident could be reduced.<

Longitudinal adjustment

1. Pull the lever and slide the seat into the desired position.

2. Release the lever and move the seat slightly forward or back so that it engages properly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Adjustments CONTROLS

41

Backrest Adjusting backrest angle, refer to page 106.

Head restraints

Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats; otherwise, there is an

increased risk of injury in an accident.<

Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.

Height adjustment

To raise: pull up.

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Removing Only remove a head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in question.

Reinstall the head restraint before trans- porting passengers, as otherwise the head

restraint cannot provide its protective func- tion.<

Front 1. Pull up as far as it will go.

2. Fold the backrest back slightly.

3. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint out as far as it will go.

4. MINI Countryman: press the additional button 2 with a suitable tool.

5. Pull out the head restraint.

6. Fold back the backrest.

Rear 1. Pull up as far as it will go.

2. Fold the backrest forward slightly.

3. Press button 1 and pull the head restraint out as far as it will go.

4. Press the additional button 2 with a suitable tool.

5. Pull the head restraint all the way out.

6. Fold rear seat backrest back into position.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Adjustments

42

Seat heating

Switching on Press once for each temperature level. Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.

If you continue driving within the next 15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically activated at the previously set temperature.

The temperature is lowered or the heating is switched off entirely to reduce the drain on the battery. The LEDs stay lit.

Switching off Press button longer.

Safety belts Observe the instructions on page 39 to ensure the best possible personal protec-

tion.<

Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Front and rear seats MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Closing Make sure you hear the lock engage in the belt buckle.

The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop- erly, page 39.

Opening 1. Grasp the belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the buckle.

3. Guide the belt into its reel.

MINI Countryman: height adjustment for rear safety belt tongues When the outer rear seats are unoccupied, the safety belt tongues can be slid back to the cargo area trim panel with a clasp to prevent noise.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Adjustments CONTROLS

43

MINI Countryman: rear seat center belt The belt buckle marked with the word CENTER is designed exclusively for the middle passenger.

If the center safety belt is used in the back, the backrests must be locked, see page 107; other- wise the safety belt will not have a restraining effect.

Belt take-up on headliner The take-up for the safety belt is on the head- liner.

1 Opening for safety belt

2 Receptacle for small belt latch

Remove small belt latch from the take-up. Guide both belt latches downwards.

Fastening

Insert safety belt with small belt latch 2 into the small belt buckle 3.

Opening Press red button on small belt buckle 3 with belt latch 1.

If the center belt is locked:

Press red button 3 with the belt latch of the left outside belt.

Buckle belt

1 Large belt latch

2 Small belt latch

3 Small belt buckle

4 Large belt buckle

The belt latch 1 must be inserted into the belt buckle 4. Make sure you hear the lock engage in the belt buckle.

Insert the belt latch into the belt buckle so that the safety belt is properly attached

when a person is buckled in, and is not twisted.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Adjustments

44

Stow away the center belt If the center seat is not occupied, then insert the belt buckles 3 and 4 into the corresponding holders, arrows.

Guide belt latches to the belt take-ups on the headliner, refer to page 43, and insert them in the provided take-ups.

Safety Belt Reminder

Front seats The indicator lamps come on and an acoustic signal sounds. A message also appears on the Control Display. Check whether the safety belt has been fas-

tened correctly. The Safety Belt Reminder is issued when the driver's safety belt has not been fastened. The Safety Belt Reminder is also acti- vated at road speeds above approx. 5 mph or 8 km/h if the front passenger's safety belt has not been fastened, if objects are placed on the front passenger seat, or if driver or front passen- ger unfasten their safety belts.

Damage to safety belts If the safety belts are damaged or stressed in an accident: have the safety belt system

and its seat-belt tensioners replaced and the belt anchors checked. Have this work carried out only by a MINI dealer or by a workshop that has specially trained personnel working in accor- dance with the specifications of the MINI manu- facturer; otherwise, correct operation of these safety systems is not ensured.<

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors The mirror on the passenger's side is more curved than the driver's mirror. The

objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind you on the basis of what you see in the mirror; otherwise, there is an increased risk of an accident.<

Adjusting electrically

1 Adjustments

2 Select left/right mirror

3 Tilting mirrors in and out

Selecting the mirror:

Switching to the other mirror: slide the mirror switch.

To adjust:

The same as the button movement.

Folding mirrors in and out:

Press button 3. The mirrors can be folded in at road speeds up to approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

This can be beneficial in narrow streets, for example, or for moving mirrors that were folded in by hand back out into their correct positions.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Adjustments CONTROLS

45

Manual adjustment If there is, for example, an electrical failure, press on the edges of the mirror glass.

Automatic heating At external temperatures below a certain limit, both exterior mirrors are automatically heated while the engine is running or the ignition switched on.

Interior rearview mirror

To reduce glare from vehicles behind you when you are driving at night:

Turn the knob.

Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature

It is controlled by two photosensors:

> Inside the interior rearview mirror, arrow.

> On the back of the mirror.

For proper function:

> Keep the photosensors clean.

> Do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and the windshield.

> Do not place stickers or decals on the wind- shield in front of the mirror.

Steering wheel

Adjustments Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the car is in motion; otherwise, there

is a risk of accident due to an unexpected move- ment.<

1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred distance and angle to suit your seated posi- tion.

3. Swing the lever back up.

Do not use force to swing the lever back up; otherwise, the mechanism

will be damaged.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

46

Transporting children safely

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

The right place for children

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger

themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.<

Children should always sit in the rear Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.

Only transport children under the age of 13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear

in a child restraint system suitable for their age, weight and size. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci- dent.<

Children 13 years of age or older must be buck- led in with a safety belt as soon as there no longer is any child restraint system that is appro- priate for their age, size and weight.

Exception for front passenger seat

Front passenger airbags Should it be necessary to use a child restraint system on the front passenger

seat, the front and side airbags must be deacti- vated. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child if the airbags deploy, even if the child is seated in a child restraint system.<

For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 82.

Child restraint systems, installation Before installing a child restraint system on the rear seats, move the seat as far back as possible.

5-seater: adjust the inclination of the center backrest to the respective outer backrest.

After the child restraint system has been installed on the respective rear seat, move the backrest forward so that the it rests lightly against the child restraint system, refer to Rear seat backrests on page 107.

Observe the child restraint system manu- facturer's instructions when selecting,

installing and using child restraint systems. Oth- erwise, the protective effect may be dimin- ished.<

On the front passenger seat After installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that

the front, side, and knee airbags for the front passenger are deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<

Seat position Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back and up as possible to obtain the best possible position for the belt. Do not change the seat position after this.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

47

Child seat security

The illustration shows the MINI Countryman as an example.

All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the front passenger can be prevented from being pulled out in order to secure child restraint sys- tems.

Locking the safety belt 1. Secure the child restraint system with the

belt.

2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.

3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut against the child restraint system.

The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt 1. Open the belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the way.

Center belt: unlocking additional belt buckle 3, see page 43. Guide safety belt to the take-up on the headliner.

LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.

To install and use the LATCH child restraint system, follow the operating and safety

instructions provided by the manufacturer of the

system; otherwise, the protective function of the seat may be compromised.<

Anchor points for LATCH anchors When the child is restrained by the internal har- nesses, the lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg.

Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out of the area for the child restraint fixing system.

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are located at the points indicated by the arrows.

Make sure that both lower LATCH anchors are properly engaged and that the child

restraint system rests firmly against the seat backrest; otherwise, the protective function of the seat may be compromised.<

Child restraint system with tether strap Use the tether strap anchors to secure child restraint systems only; otherwise, the

anchors could be damaged.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Transporting children safely

48

MINI Countryman 4-seater:

The child restraint anchor fittings, see arrows, are located behind the back of the rear seats.

5-seater:

The child restraint anchor fittings for the two outer seats, see arrows, are located behind the back of the rear seats. The child restraint anchor fitting for the center seat is located under the luggage-compartment sill, position 4 in picture center seat.

MINI Paceman

The child restraint anchor fittings, see arrows, are located behind the back of the rear seats.

Placement of the tether strap Make sure the upper tether strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as

it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint sys- tem in the event of an accident.<

Outer seats:

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Rear cargo well

4 Tether strap hook

5 Anchor

6 Seat backrest

7 Tether strap of the child restraint system

MINI Countryman, center seat:

1 Forward driving direction

2 Head rest

3 Attaching clip

4 Child restraint anchor fitting

5 Load area floor

6 Seat back

7 Strap of the child restraint system

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Transporting children safely CONTROLS

49

Attaching upper tether strap to the attachment point 1. Slide the head restraint upward.

2. Center seat: fold the load area floor back- wards

3. Guide the tether strap between the head restraint holders.

4. Attach the tether strap to the anchor using the hook.

5. Push the head restraint into its lowermost position.

6. Pull the tether strap tight.

MINI Countryman: Securing doors and windows

Rear doors

Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors.

The door can now be opened from the outside only.

Safety switch for power windows The rear power windows are blocked and can- not be operated from the rear. Press safety switch, refer to page 37.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Driving

50

Driving

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Ignition lock

Inserting the key into the ignition lock Insert the key all the way into the ignition lock.

Radio readiness Individual electrical consumers can operate.

Removing the key from the ignition lock Press in the key briefly. It is ejected slightly.

At the same time:

> The ignition is switched off if it was on beforehand.

Automatic transmission The key can only be removed if the selector lever is in position P: interlock.

Start/Stop button

Press the Start/Stop button to switch radio readi- ness or the ignition on and off. Do not depress the brake or clutch while doing so.

If the Start/Stop button is pressed while the clutch is depressed in the manual

transmission or the brake pedal is depressed in the automatic transmission, the engine starts.<

Radio readiness Individual electrical consumers can operate. The time and external temperature are displayed in the tachometer.

Radio readiness is switched off automatically:

> When the key is removed from the ignition lock

> When using Comfort Access by pressing the button on the door handle or the

button on the remote control, refer to Locking on page 34

> After a certain has elapsed

Ignition on Most indicator and warning lamps in indicator area 1, page 13, light up for varying lengths of time.

When the engine is off, switch off the igni- tion and any unnecessary electrical con-

sumers in order to preserve the battery.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Driving CONTROLS

51

Radio readiness and ignition off All indicator and warning lamps in the displays go out.

The ignition switches off automatically if the driver's door is opened. Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches the ignition back on.

The ignition is not switched off in situations such as the following:

> The clutch or brake is depressed

> The low beams are switched on

Starting the engine Do not allow the engine to run in enclosed areas; otherwise, inhalation of the noxious

exhaust gases can lead to loss of consciousness and death. Exhaust gases contain carbon mon- oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running; otherwise, such a vehicle repre- sents a potential safety hazard. Before leaving the car while the engine is run- ning, place the transmission in neutral or move the selector lever to position P and forcefully apply the parking brake to prevent the car from moving.<

Avoid frequent starting in quick succes- sion or repeated start attempts in which

the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the cat- alytic converter.<

Do not let the engine warm up with the vehicle at a standstill. Move off immediately at a moder- ate engine speed.

When starting the engine, do not depress the accelerator pedal.

Manual transmission Key in ignition lock or inside vehicle with Com- fort Access, refer to page 33.

1. Depress the brake.

2. Depress the clutch.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Automatic transmission Key in ignition lock or inside vehicle with Com- fort Access, refer to page 33.

1. Depress the brake.

2. Shift the selector lever into position P or N.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Switching off the engine Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

When parking, apply the parking brake force- fully; otherwise, the vehicle could begin to roll. Secure the vehicle on steep upward and down- ward slopes, for example, turn the steering wheel towards the curb.<

Manual transmission 1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/

Stop button.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Driving

52

Automatic transmission 1. With the car at a stop, move the selector

lever to position P.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

Before driving into a car wash By following these steps, the vehicle is able to roll:

1. Place the remote control, even with Comfort Access, in the ignition lock.

2. Depress the brake.

3. Move the selector lever to position N.

4. Switch off the engine.

Parking brake The parking brake is primarily intended to pre- vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.

In addition, follow the instructions on page 51 under Switching off the engine.

Applying The lever locks in position automatically.

Releasing

Pull upward slightly, press the button, arrow, and guide the lever down.

In exceptional cases, if the parking brake has to be used to slow or stop the car, do

not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con- tinuously press the button of the parking brake

lever. Otherwise, excessive force could lead to over- braking and loss of traction, i.e. fishtailing, at the rear axle.<

Manual transmission

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise,

the engine could be damaged if you inadvert- ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<

Reverse gear Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.

Automatic transmission with Steptronic In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can shift gears manually using Steptronic, page 54.

Parking the vehicle To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always select position P and apply the parking

brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine running.<

Removing the key To remove the key from the ignition lock, first move the selector lever into position P and then switch off the engine: interlock. Remove the key from the ignition lock, refer to page 50.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Driving CONTROLS

53

Selector lever positions P R N D M/S +

Displays in the tachometer

P R N D DS M1 to M6

The selector lever position is displayed, or the current gear in the manual mode.

Changing selector lever positions > The selector lever can only be moved out of

position P when the ignition is switched on or the engine is running.

> Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise, the selector lever will refuse to move: shiftlock.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position,

depress the brake until you are ready to start.<

A lock prevents accidental shifting into selector lever positions R and P.

Overriding the selector lever lock

Press the button on the front of the selector lever, arrow.

P Park Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. The front wheels are blocked.

R Reverse Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral Select this when you are in a car wash, for exam- ple. The vehicle can roll.

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for- ward gears are selected automatically.

Under normal operating conditions, the fuel consumption is lowest when driving in position D.

Kickdown Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum performance. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the full- throttle resistance point.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Driving

54

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Move the selector lever from position D to the left into the M/S shifting slot: The Sport program is activated and DS is dis- played. This position is recommended for a per- formance-oriented driving style.

To deactivate the Sport program or manual mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

Shifting with the selector lever Push the selector lever forward or pull it back to activate manual operation. Steptronic shifts the gear.

> Pull the selector lever in the + direction. Transmission shifts up.

> Push the selector lever in the direction. Transmission shifts down.

The selected gear is displayed in the tachome- ter, e.g. M1.

To use the automatic mode again, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to over- rev will not be executed by the system. The selected gear is displayed briefly, followed by the current gear.

Shifting on the steering wheel With the selector lever in position D, automatic drive, you can shift gears using the shift paddles on the steering wheel. The transmission auto- matically switches to manual mode.

If you do not shift gears with the shift paddles or accelerate for a certain amount of time, the transmission automatically returns to D, auto- matic drive.

> Pull one of the shift paddles. Transmission shifts up.

> Push one of the shift paddles. Transmission shifts down.

M1 through M6 are displayed in the tachometer.

Manually releasing the selector lever lock Should the selector lever refuse to move out of position P even though the ignition is switched on, the brake is depressed and the button on the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be overridden:

1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.

2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out. Disconnect the cable connector if necessary.

3. Insert extractor hook 1 into the loop on the passenger's side.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Driving CONTROLS

55

The extractor hook is in the onboard document holder or in the pouch for

the tire-changing set, page 232.<

4. Pull the loop up.

5. Move the selector lever into the desired position by pressing the button on the front of the selector lever.

Before manually unlocking the selector lever lock, firmly set the parking brake to

prevent the vehicle from rolling away.<

Turn signals/ headlamp flasher

1 Turn signals

2 Headlamp flasher

Using turn signals Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To turn off manually, press the lever to the resis- tance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that an indicator bulb has

failed.<

Signaling a turn briefly Press the lever as far as the resistance point for as long as you wish to signal a turn.

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever as far as the resistance point.

You can set whether the turn signal flashes once or three times.

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Triple turn signal"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Wiper system Do not turn on the wipers when they are frozen; otherwise, the wiper blades and

the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.<

Do not use the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry; otherwise the wiper

blades may wear out faster or be damaged.<

1 Switching on wipers

2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe

3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Driving

56

Switching on wipers Press the lever upward, arrow 1.

The lever automatically returns to its initial posi- tion when released.

Normal wiper speed Press once. The system switches to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed Press twice or press beyond the resistance point. The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is preset.

If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor Press button, arrow 3.

This symbol is displayed in the tachometer.

Deactivate the rain sensor before entering an automatic car wash. Failure to do so

could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.<

Adjusting the sensitivity of the rain sensor 1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 50.

2. Press the button in the turn signal indicator as often as necessary until "SET/INFO" is dis- played.

3. Press and hold the button until the display changes.

4. Press the button as often as necessary until the symbol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the display changes.

6. Press the button to select the desired sensi- tivity.

7. Wait, or press and hold the button until the display changes. The settings are stored.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Driving CONTROLS

57

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor Press the button again, arrow 3.

Brief wipe Press the lever downward once, arrow 2.

Cleaning windshield and headlamps Pull the lever, arrow 4.

Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and the wipers are operated briefly.

When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.

In cars equipped with an alarm system, the headlamps cannot be cleaned when the hood is open.

Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will

damage the washer pump. Only use the washers if the hood has been com- pletely closed; otherwise, the headlamp washer system may be damaged. Do not use the wash- ers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield. If you do, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze.<

Window washer nozzles The window washer nozzles are heated auto- matically while the engine is running or the igni- tion is switched on.

Rear window wiper

0 Rear wipers parked

1 To switch on intermittent wipe : Turn the cap to level 1. Operation is continuous in reverse gear.

The rear wiper does not move if the cap is in interval stage 1 before the ignition is switched on.

Cleaning the rear window 2 To clean the rear window during intermit-

tent wipe : Turn the cap further to level 2 and hold it there.

3 To clean the rear window when wipers are parked : Turn the cap to level 3 and hold it there.

Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will

damage the washer pump.<

Washer fluid

General information Washer fluid is flammable. Keep it away from ignition sources, only store it in the

closed, original container, and keep out of reach of children; otherwise, there is a danger of injury. Comply with the instructions on the con- tainer.<

United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the applicable limits on allowable washer fluid dilution ratios. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container. Use MINI Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent.

Washer fluid reservoir Only refill washer fluid that contains anti- freeze when the engine is cool, to avoid

contact with hot engine parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire hazard and a risk to per- sonal safety.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Driving

58

Fill with a mixture of washer fluid concentrate and water and, if required, with a washer anti- freeze according to manufacturer's recommen- dations.

Do not fill with undiluted washer fluid concen- trate and do not use water alone; these can damage the washer system.

Mix the water and antifreeze before filling the washer fluid reservoir to make sure

the correct concentration is maintained.<

Capacity Approx. 4.2 US quarts/4 liters.

Cruise control

The concept Cruise control is available at vehicle speeds of at least approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores and maintains the speed that you specify using the button on the steering wheel.

Do not use cruise control when driving at constant speed is prevented by adverse

conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or poor road conditions due to, e.g. snow, rain, ice or loose surfaces. Otherwise, you could lose con- trol of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.<

Activating

1 Maintaining, storing and increasing speed

2 Activating/deactivating cruise control

3 Maintaining, storing and decreasing speed

4 Resuming cruise control

Activating/deactivating cruise control Press button 2.

Interruption The system is automatically deactivated if:

> Braking takes place

> The clutch is engaged

> The transmission is set on N

> The stability control system is on

Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved again and maintained.

The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is switched off.

Maintaining current speed Press button 1.

The system maintains and stores the current vehicle speed.

If, on a downhill grade, the engine braking effect is not sufficient, the controlled speed may be exceeded. On uphill grades vehicle speed may drop if the engine output is insufficient.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Driving CONTROLS

59

Increasing speed Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired speed is reached. Every time you press the but- ton, the speed increases by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.

Accelerating using the button Press and hold button 1.

The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the driving speed is maintained and stored.

Decreasing speed Press button 3 repeatedly until the desired speed is reached.

The functions here are the same as for increas- ing the speed or accelerating, except that the speed will be decreased.

Resuming a speed stored beforehand Press button 4.

The last speed stored is achieved again and maintained.

The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is switched off.

Displays

Selected speed is displayed briefly.

If --- mph or --- km/h is displayed briefly in the tachometer, the conditions necessary

for operation may not be fulfilled.<

For better control Indicator lamp in the speedometer lights up. The cruise control system is ready and can be activated.

Malfunction The warning lamp in the tachometer lights up if the system fails. A message appears on the Control Display.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Controls overview

60

Controls overview

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Fuel gauge

Fuel tank capacity Approx. 12.4 US gal/47 liters.

You will find information on refueling on page 201.

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

The arrow next to the gas pump symbol of the fuel gauge points toward the side of the vehicle with the fuel filler flap.

Reserve Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone of approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters the remaining LEDs change from orange to red, arrow, and a mes- sage is displayed briefly on the Control Display. The tachometer displays the remaining cruising range. When the range is less than approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message remains in the Control Display.

If the range displayed is less than 30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-

wise, engine functions are not guaranteed and damage may occur.<

With a dynamic driving style, e.g. rapid corner- ing, engine functions are not always assured.

Tachometer

Never operate the engine with the needle in the red overspeed zone of the gauge. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Displays in tachometer

1 Current vehicle speed

2 Odometer in kilometers, trip recorder, external temperature, time

3 Resetting the trip odometer

Press button on turn signal indicator to call up information in the display area 2.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Controls overview CONTROLS

61

The following information is displayed sequen- tially:

> Trip odometer

> Time

> External temperature

Trip odometer To display trip recorder: Briefly press button 3.

Resetting the trip odometer: While the trip recorder is displayed and the igni- tion is switched on, press button 3.

Time To set time, see page 66.

External temperature, external temperature warning When the displayed temperature sinks to approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is an increased risk of black ice.

Even at temperatures above +377/+36 ice can form. Therefore, drive carefully,

e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the shade; otherwise, there is an increased accident risk.<

Units of measure Select the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for the external temperature, page 64.

Computer

Displays in the tachometer

Press the button in the turn signal lever repeat- edly to call up various items of information.

The following information is displayed sequen- tially:

> Cruising range

> Average fuel consumption

> Current fuel consumption

> Average speed

To set the corresponding units of measure, refer to Units of measure on page 64.

Cruising range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated on the basis of the way the car has been driven over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of fuel currently in the tank.

If the range displayed is less than 30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-

wise, engine functions are not guaranteed and damage could occur.<

Average fuel consumption Calculated for the time the engine has been run- ning.

With the trip computer, page 62, you can have the average fuel consumption for another trip displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Controls overview

62

To reset average fuel consumption: press the button in the turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel consumption to allow you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with minimum exhaust emissions.

Average speed Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed.

With the trip computer, page 62, you can have the average speed for another trip displayed.

To reset average speed: press the button in the turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Displays on the Control Display 1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Displays in the "Onboard info":

> Cruising range

> Distance from destination

> Probable arrival time when a destination has been input into the navigation system, page 120.

Displays in the "Trip computer":

> Departure time

> Trip duration

> Trip distance

Both displays show:

> Average fuel consumption and

> Average speed.

Resetting the fuel consumption and speed To reset the values for the average speed and average fuel consumption:

1. Select the respective menu entry.

2. Press the MINI joystick to confirm the mes- sage.

Resetting the trip computer To reset all values:

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Trip computer"

3. "Reset"

Settings and information

Operating principle Certain settings and information are only avail- able when the ignition is switched on, the vehi- cle is at a standstill and the doors are closed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Controls overview CONTROLS

63

1 Button for:

> Selecting display

> Setting values

> Confirming selected display or set values

> Calling up computer information 61

Exiting displays

1. Press the button in the turn signal lever repeatedly until "HOME" is displayed.

2. Press the button for a longer period.

Displays are also exited if no entries are made for approx. 8 seconds.

Next setting or item of information

1. While in a setting or information item, press the button in the turn signal indicator repeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed.

2. Press the button for a longer period.

The display changes directly to the next setting or item of information.

Symbol Function

Adjusting rain sensor 56

Calling up Check Control 67

Service requirements 64

Exiting the menu

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Controls overview

64

Units of measure To set the units of measure. The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. Select the desired menu item.

4. Select the desired unit.

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are briefly displayed immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.

The extent of service work required can be read out from the remote control by your

MINI dealer.<

Possible displays

1 Button for selecting information

Symbol Function

Engine oil

Front brakes

Rear brakes

Road worthiness test

Vehicle check

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Controls overview CONTROLS

65

More information on the MINI Maintenance Sys- tem can be found on page 218.

More information

Detailed information on service requirements You can have further information on the scope of maintenance displayed on the Control Dis- play, refer to page 16.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed.

You can request more detailed information on every entry:

Select an entry and press the MINI joystick.

To exit from the menu:

Move the MINI joystick to the left. A list of selected maintenance schedules and, if required, legally mandated inspections, is shown.

Symbols No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a legally man- dated inspection is approaching. Please

schedule a service appointment.

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering deadlines for legally required inspections Make sure the date on the Control Display is always set correctly, page 67; otherwise, the effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not ensured.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Service required"

Brake fluid

Exit display 63

Next setting or item of information 63

Symbol Function

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Controls overview

66

4. " Vehicle inspection"

5. Open the deadline entry menu.

6. "Date:"

7. Create the settings.

8. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting. The year is highlighted.

9. Turn the MINI joystick to make the adjust- ment.

10. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting. The date entry is stored.

To exit from the menu: Move the MINI joystick to the left.

Clock

Setting the time 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time:"

4. Turn the MINI joystick to set the hours and press the MINI joystick.

5. Turn the MINI joystick to set the minutes and press the MINI joystick.

The system accepts the new time.

Setting the time format The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.

1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:"

4. Select the desired format and press the MINI joystick.

The time format is stored.

Setting time zone 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Time zone:"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Controls overview CONTROLS

67

4. Turn MINI joystick until the desired time zone is set and press the MINI joystick.

The time zone is stored.

Date

Setting date 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Date:"

4. Turn MINI joystick until the desired day is displayed and press the MINI joystick.

5. Create the necessary settings for the month and year.

The date is stored.

Setting the date format 1. "Settings"

2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:"

4. Select the desired format.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.

Check Control

The concept The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys- tems monitored. Check Control messages

involve indicator and warning lamps in the dis- play and, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal as well as text messages at the bottom of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lamps

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in var- ious combinations and colors in the indicator areas 1 and 2.

Text messages Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Supplemental text messages For most Check Control messages, you can view more information later, e.g. regarding the cause of a malfunction and how to respond, refer to page 68.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.

Exit display: "OK"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Controls overview

68

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button in the turn signal lever.

> Some Check Control messages are displayed until the malfunctions have been rectified. They cannot be hidden. If several malfunc- tions occur at the same time, they are dis- played in succession.

>They are marked with the symbol shown here.

> Other Check Control messages are automat- ically hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.

>They are marked with the symbol shown here.

The symbol indicates that Check Control mes- sages have been stored. Check Control mes- sages can be viewed whenever it is convenient.

Viewing stored Check Control messages Stored Check Control messages can only be dis- played if the driver's door is closed.

1. Press the button in the turn signal indicator as often as necessary until "SET/INFO" is dis- played.

2. Press and hold the button until the display changes.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the corre- sponding symbol and "CHECK INFO" appear in the display.

4. Press and hold the button. If there are no Check Control messages, then "CHECK OK" is displayed. If a Check Control message has been stored, the corresponding message is displayed. In addition, the text message appears on the Control Display.

5. Press the button to display any other mes- sages.

Displaying on the onboard computer 1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Check Control"

4. Select a text message.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Controls overview CONTROLS

69

Speed limit Enter a speed, and a Check Control message will indicate when you reach this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area. You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit 1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Warning at:"

4. Turn the MINI joystick to set the limit.

5. Press the MINI joystick to apply the setting.

The limit is stored.

Applying your current speed as limit 1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Select current speed"

4. Press the MINI joystick.

The system adopts your current speed as the limit.

Activating/deactivating the limit 1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Warning"

4. Press the MINI joystick.

Altering settings

Language on the Control Display 1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Controls overview

70

3. "Language:"

4. Select the desired language.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Setting the voice dialog Switch between a standard dialog and a short dialog.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select the desired dialog.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Brightness of the Control Display The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. Note, however, that you can change the basic setting while the low beams are switched on. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. "Settings"

2. "Control display"

3. "Brightness"

4. Turn the MINI joystick until the desired set- ting is reached.

5. Press the MINI joystick.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use. In bright conditions, for example, the brightness control may not be clearly visible.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS

71

Technology for driving comfort and safety

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Park Distance Control PDC

The concept PDC assists you with parking in reverse. Acoustic signals and a visual indicator warn you of the presence of an object behind the vehicle. The measurement is carried out by four ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumper.

These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/2 m. However, an acoustic warning

does not sound until an object is approx. 24 in/ 60 cm from the rear corner sensors or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the rear center sensors. PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed; otherwise, physical cir- cumstances may lead to the system warning being issued too late.<

Automatic mode With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the system is activated automatically after approx. 1 second when you engage reverse gear or move the automatic transmission selec- tor lever to position R. Wait this short period before driving.

Acoustic signals As the distance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone sounds.

If the distance remains constant, e.g. when driv- ing parallel to a wall, the acoustic signal stops after approx. 3 seconds.

Malfunction Indicator lamp lights up. PDC has failed. A message appears on the Control Dis- play. Have the system checked.

To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not direct the jet toward the sensors for lengthy periods and only spray from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.

PDC with visual warning To have the system show distances to objects on the Control Display. The contours of distant objects are shown on the Control Display even before the acoustic signal sounds. The display appears on the Control Display as soon as the transmission is shifted into reverse or the selec- tor lever is moved into the R position.

System limitations Even with PDC, final responsibility for esti- mating the distance between the vehicle

and any obstructions always remains with the driver. Sensors, too, have blind spots in which objects cannot be detected. Moreover, ultra- sonic detection can reach its physical limits with objects such as trailer tow bars and couplings, thin and wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects already indicated, such as curbs, may

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety

72

enter the sensors' blind spots before or after a continuous audible signal is given. Higher, pro- truding objects, such as wall ledges, may not be detectable. Therefore, always drive cautiously; otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or property damage. Loud sound sources outside or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal.<

Driving stability control systems Your MINI has a number of systems that help to maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse driving conditions.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with driving stability control systems.

An appropriate driving style always remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore do not reduce the additional safety margin by engaging in hazardous driving thereby running the risk of an accident.<

Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak- ing. Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.

Braking safely, refer to page 105.

ABS is operational every time you start the engine.

Cornering Brake Control CBC Driving stability and steering characteristics are further enhanced while braking in turns or dur- ing a lane change.

Electronic brake-force distribution EBV The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

Brake Assist Rapidly depressing the brake causes this system to automatically develop maximum braking

force. Thus, the system helps keep braking dis- tance to a minimum. At the same time, all the benefits provided by ABS are exploited.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the duration of the full braking application.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC

The concept DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing traction when you pull away from rest or accel- erate.

DSC also detects unstable driving conditions such as when the vehicle's rear end fishtails or the vehicle is sliding on its front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions at the indi- vidual wheels.

Every time that the engine is started, DSC is ready to operate.

Deactivating DSC

Press the switch until the DSC OFF indicator lamp on the speedometer lights up and DSC OFF is displayed on the tachometer. DSC is deacti- vated. Stabilizing and propulsion promoting actions are no longer executed.

When driving with snow chains or to 'rock free' in snow, it can be helpful to switch off DSC for a brief period.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS

73

Activating DSC Press the switch again: the DSC indicator lamps in the display elements go out.

For better control The indicator lamp on the tachometer is flashing: DSC controls the driving and braking

forces.

The indicator lamp DSC OFF on the speedometer is on and DSC OFF is dis- played on the tachometer:

DSC is deactivated.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC

The concept DTC is a type of DSC that is propulsion optimized for special road conditions such as uncleared snowy roads. The system ensures maximum propulsion though with restricted driving stabil- ity. You therefore need to drive with suitable caution.

In the following exceptional situations, it can be useful to briefly activate DTC:

> When driving on snow-covered inclines, in slush, or on uncleared snowy roads

> When rocking the vehicle free, driving out of deep snow or on loose surfaces

> When driving with snow chains

Activating DTC

Press the switch; the indicator lamp DSC OFF on the speedometer comes on and TRACTION is displayed on the tachometer. The Dynamic Stability Control DSC is deacti- vated; the Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti- vated.

For better control The indicator lamp on the tachometer is flashing: DTC controls the driving and braking

forces.

The indicator lamp on the speedometer is on and TRACTION is displayed on the tachometer:

DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTC Press switch again, the indicator lamps DSC OFF on the speedometer and TRACTION on the tachometer go out.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety

74

Deactivating both DTC and DSC

Press the switch for at least 3 seconds; the indi- cator lamp DSC OFF on the speedometer comes on and DSC OFF is displayed on the tachometer. The Dynamic Traction Control DTC and Dynamic Stability Control DSC are both deactivated. There will be no more stabilizing interventions.

Interventions (differential lock) in braking occur to improve propulsion when drive wheels are rotating unevenly, even when DSC is deacti- vated.

Activating DSC Press the switch again: the indicator lamps in the display elements go out.

Hill Assist Hill Assist aids you in comfortably driving off on inclines. It is not necessary to use the parking brake for this.

1. Hold the MINI with the brake.

2. Release the brake and immediately drive off.

Hill Assist holds the car in place for approx. 2 seconds after the brake is released.

Depending on the load and gradient, the vehicle can roll backward slightly during

this period. After you release the brake, immedi- ately start driving since the Hill Assist only holds the vehicle for about 2 seconds, and it will start to roll backward.<

ALL4 all-wheel drive system ALL4 is the all-wheel drive system of your MINI. The combined effects of ALL4 and DSC further optimize the traction and dynamic driving char- acteristics. The ALL4 all-wheel drive system vari- ably distributes the drive force to the front and rear axle depending on the driving situation and prevailing road conditions.

Sport button Pressing the button causes your MINI to respond even more sportily.

> Engine responds more spontaneously to movements of the accelerator.

> Steering response is more direct.

> Cooper S, John Cooper Works: the engine sounds more sporty in coasting mode.

With automatic transmission:

> More rapid gear shifting in Sport program.

Activating the system

Press the switch. The LED lights up.

SPORT is briefly displayed in the tachometer.

Deactivating the system > Press the switch again.

> Switch off the engine.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS

75

Flat Tire Monitor FTM

The concept The system does not measure the actual infla- tion pressure in the tires.

The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individ- ual wheels while moving.

In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre- sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirement The system must have been initialized while the tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.

Initialize the system after every correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

System limitations Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in

advance.<

A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires can- not be detected. Therefore, check the tire infla- tion pressure regularly.

In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:

> System has not been initialized

> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface

> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration

> Snow chains are attached

Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g. whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The status is displayed.

Initializing the system The initialization process adopts the set inflation tire pressures as reference values for the detec- tion of a flat tire. Initialization is started by con- firming the inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Reset"

4. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

5. Select "Reset" to start the initialization.

6. Start to drive.

The initialization is completed during driv- ing, which can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the initialization is con- tinued automatically.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety

76

Indication of a flat tire The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. An acoustic signal also sounds.

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with cau- tion. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with normal tires or with run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 212, are identi- fied by a circular symbol containing the let- ters RSC on the tire sidewall.

If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires, do not continue driving; continuing

to drive can result in serious accidents.<

When a flat tire is reported, the Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do so, check the inflation pressure in all four tires. The inflation pressure display of the Mobility Kit, page 230, can be used for this purpose.

If the inflation pressure in all four tires is cor- rect, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have been initialized. The system must then be initialized.

If it is not possible to identify the damaged tire, contact your MINI dealer

2. Use the Mobility Kit to remedy the flat tire on the damaged wheel, refer to page 230.

Run-flat tires You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph or 80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire When driving with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu- vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or 80 km/h.

3. At the next opportunity, check the air pres- sure in all four tires.

If the inflation pressure in all four tires is cor- rect, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have been initialized. The system must then be initialized.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure:

The distance it is possible to drive depends on the load and the stress on the vehicle while driv- ing.

With an average load, it may be possible to drive for approx. 50 miles/80 km.

When driving with damaged tires, the handling characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid sooner when braking, braking distances will be longer, or self-steering response will change. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid turn- ing abruptly and driving over obstacles such as curbs, potholes, etc.

Since the possible driving distance depends to a considerable degree on the strain exerted on the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or, with a gentle driving style, can also be longer, depending on the speed, road condition, exter- nal temperature, vehicle load, etc.

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g. reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering prop- erties.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS

77

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate final failure of the tire. Reduce

your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; oth- erwise, pieces of tire may come off, which could result in an accident. Do not continue driving and contact your MINI dealer.<

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The concept Measuring the inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

Functional requirement The system must have been reset while the inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reli- able signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly.

Reset the system again after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

System limitations Sudden, serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in

advance.<

The system does not operate correctly if it has not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be indicated despite correct tire inflation pressures.

The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire:

> If a wheel without TPM electronics is mounted

> Interference with TPM by other systems or devices with the same transmission fre- quency.

Status display The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor can be displayed by the onboard computer, e.g. whether or not the TPM is activated.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"

The status is displayed.

Status indicator on the onboard computer The tire and system condition is indicated by the color of the tires.

A change in the tire inflation pressure during driving is taken into account.

A correction is only required when this is indi- cated by the TPM.

Green wheels The inflation pressure corresponds to the desired state.

"TPM active" is displayed on the onboard com- puter.

One wheel yellow There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres- sure in the indicated tire.

All wheels yellow > There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire

pressure in one or more tires.

> The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus issues a warning based on the inflation pressures initialized last.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety

78

Gray wheels The system cannot detect a puncture.

Reasons for this may be:

> TPM is being reset.

> Interference from systems or devices with the same transmission frequency.

> Malfunction.

Resetting system Reset the system again after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

1. "Vehicle Info"

2. "Vehicle status"

3. "Reset"

4. Start the engine do not drive away.

5. Select "Reset" to start the initialization.

6. Start to drive.

The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.

After driving a few minutes, the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the target values to be monitored. The resetting process is completed automatically as you drive. The tires are depicted in green on the Control Display and "Status: TPM active" is displayed again.

The trip can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, resetting is continued auto- matically.

If a flat tire is detected while the system is resetting, all tires on the Control Display

are displayed in yellow. The message "Low tire!" is displayed.<

Message with low tire inflation pressure The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the onboard computer. An acoustic signal also sounds.

> There is a flat tire or substantial loss in tire pressure in the displayed tire.

> The system was not reset after a wheel change and thus issues a warning based on the inflation pressures initialized last.

1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with cau- tion. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with normal tires or with run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 212, are identi- fied by a circular symbol containing the let- ters RSC on the tire sidewall.

When a low inflation pressure is reported, the Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do so, check the inflation pressure in all four tires. The inflation pressure display of the Mobility Kit, page 230, can be used for this purpose.

If the inflation pressure is correct in all four tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. The system must then be reset.

If it is not possible to identify the damaged tire, contact your MINI dealer.

2. Use the Mobility Kit to remedy the flat tire on the damaged wheel, refer to page 230.

The use of tire sealant, e.g. Mobility Kit, can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced if necessary at your earliest oppor- tunity.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS

79

Run-flat tires You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires, do not continue driving; continuing

to drive can result in serious accidents.<

Continued driving with a flat tire When driving with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu- vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or 80 km/h.

3. At the next opportunity, check the air pres- sure in all four tires.

If the inflation pressure is correct in all four tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. The system must then be reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure:

The distance it is possible to drive depends on the load and the stress on the vehicle while driv- ing.

With an average load, it may be possible to drive for approx. 50 miles/80 km.

When driving with damaged tires, the handling characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid sooner when braking, braking distances will be longer, or self-steering response will change. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid turn- ing abruptly and driving over obstacles such as curbs, potholes, etc.

Since the possible driving distance depends to a considerable degree on the strain exerted on the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or, with a gentle driving style, can also be longer, depending on the speed, road condition, exter- nal temperature, vehicle load, etc.

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g. reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering prop- erties.<

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate complete failure of the tire.

Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; otherwise, pieces of tire may come off, which could result in an accident. Do not con- tinue driving and contact your MINI dealer.<

Malfunction The small warning lamp flashes in yel- low and then lights up continuously; the larger warning lamp lights up in yellow. On the onboard computer, the tires are

shown in gray and a message appears.

No flat tire can be detected.

Display in the following situations:

> Wheel without TPM electronics is mounted: If need be, have it checked by your MINI dealer.

> Malfunction: Have the system checked

> TPM was unable to complete the resetting procedure; reset the system again.

The small warning lamp flashes in yel- low and then lights up continuously; the larger warning lamp lights up in yellow. On the onboard computer, the tires are

shown in gray and a message appears.

No flat tire can be detected.

Display in the following situation:

> Interference due to systems or devices that use the same radio frequency: The system automatically reactivates once it is outside of the field of interference.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety

80

Message for unsuccessful system reset Yellow warning lamp comes on. A mes- sage appears on the onboard com- puter.

The system has detected a wheel change, but has not yet been reset. It is not possible to pro- vide a reliable warning about the current infla- tion pressure.

Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system, page 78.

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire infla- tion pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehi- cle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pres- sure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres- sure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substi- tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level at which the TPMS low tire pressure tell- tale illuminates.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain

continuously lit. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi- cator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replace- ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS

81

Airbags MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

The following airbags are located under the marked covers:

1 Front airbags

2 Knee airbag

3 Side airbags in backrests

4 Head airbags at the front and rear

Protective action Observe the instructions on page 38 to ensure the best possible personal protec-

tion.<

The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro- vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side airbag supports the side upper body area. The head air bag supports the head. The airbags are designed to not be triggered in every type of collision, e.g. not in minor acci- dents, certain rollover situations or rear impacts.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or

modify them in any other way. Keep the dashboard and window on the passen- ger side free from obstruction, i.e. do not cover it with adhesive film or coverings, and do not affix any holders such as for a navigation device or a mobile phone. Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other objects not specifically approved for seats with integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do not modify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes the

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Technology for driving comfort and safety

82

upholstery in the center of the steering wheel, on the instrument panel, the doors, and the roof pillars as well as the sides of the headliner. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel.<

Do not touch the individual components immediately after the system has been

triggered, because there is a danger of burns.

Have the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of airbag generators executed only by your MINI dealer or a workshop that has the required explosives licenses.

Otherwise, unprofessional attempts to service the system could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired airbag activation, either of which could result in personal injury.<

Warning notices and information about the air- bags can also be found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags The presence of a passenger in the front passen- ger seat is detected by measuring the resistance of the human body. The system correspondingly activates or deactivates the front, side, and knee airbags for the front passenger.

Make sure that the front passenger's feet remain in the footwell; otherwise, it is not

possible to guarantee the function of the front passenger airbags.<

The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status of the front pas- senger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to Status of front passenger airbags below.

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, read the safety informa-

tion and follow the instructions under Transport- ing children safely, page 46.<

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation When teenagers and adults assume certain sit- ting positions, this can cause the front, side, and knee airbags to deactivate. The indicator lamp

for the front passenger airbags lights up when this occurs. In such cases, the passenger should change his or her sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired airbag status cannot be achieved by changing the sit- ting position, transport the relevant passenger on a rear seat.

> Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by the manufacturer of your MINI.

> Do not place items on the front passenger seat.

> Do not place items under the seat which could press against the seat from below.

Status of front passenger airbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air- bags shows the functional status of the front passenger's front, side, and knee airbags in accordance with whether and how the front passenger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated.

> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a specially designated child restraint system is properly detected on the seat or the seat is unoccupied. The front, side, and knee airbags for the front passenger are not activated.

Most child seats are detected by the system. This particularly applies to

child seats that were required by NHTSA at the time of manufacture of the vehicle. After

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Technology for driving comfort and safety CONTROLS

83

installing a child seat, check that the indica- tor lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. It indicates that the child seat has been detected and that the front passenger airbags are deactivated.<

> The indicator lamp does not come on as long as a person of sufficient size and in a correct sitting position is detected on the seat. The front, side, and knee airbags for the front passenger are activated.

Operational readiness of airbag system

As of radio readiness, page 50, the warning lamp lights up briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are oper- ational.

Airbag system malfunction > The warning lamp does not come on when

radio readiness is switched on.

> The warning lamp stays lit continuously.

In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay; otherwise,

there is the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a severe accident occurs.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Lamps

84

Lamps

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Parking lamps/low beams

0 Lamps off / daytime running lights

1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights

2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps

3 Automatic headlamp control, daytime run- ning lights, welcome lamps, and Adaptive Light Control

When you open the driver's door with the igni- tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto- matically switched off if the light switch is in position 0, 2 or 3.

Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, switch position 1.

Parking lamps Turn the light switch to position 1. The front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on.

Activation of lights on one side of the vehicle for parking, page 86.

The parking lamps will discharge the bat- tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for

unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat- tery might not have enough power to start the engine.<

Low beams Turn the light switch to position 2. The low beams come on when the ignition is on.

Automatic headlamp control When the switch is in position 3, the low beams are switched on and off automatically depend- ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. Adaptive Light Control is active.

The headlamps may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.

When driving into tunnels with bright overhead lights, there may be a delay before the head- lamps come on.

The low beams remain switched on indepen- dent of the ambient lighting conditions when you switch on the fog lamps.

If the daytime running lights are activated, page 85, the low beams are always switched on with the light switch in position 3 and the igni- tion on. The exterior lamps are automatically switched off after the vehicle is parked.

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal

judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the system cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should respond to these kinds of low-visibility situations by switching the head- lamps on manually.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Lamps CONTROLS

85

Welcome lamps If you leave the light switch in the low beam or automatic headlamp control position when you switch off the ignition, the parking lamps and interior lamps come on for a certain time as soon as the vehicle is unlocked.

Pathway lighting If you activate the headlamp flasher after switching off the ignition with the lamps switched off, the low beams come on and remain on for a certain time.

The setting is stored for the remote control in use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

Setting the duration or deactivating the function 1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Pathway light.:"

4. Set a time of duration or deactivate the func- tion.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Daytime running lights The light switch can remain in the lamps off, parking lamps or automatic headlamp control position. In the lamps off position, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off after the vehicle is parked. In the parking lamps position, the park- ing lamps will stay on after the ignition is switched off.

Switch on the parking lamps separately if needed.

Depending on the national-market version, it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime running lights.

Activating/deactivating daytime running lights The setting is stored for the remote control in use, refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "Daytime running lamps"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Adaptive Light Control

The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.

Activating Adaptive Light Control With the ignition switched on, turn the light switch to position 3, refer to page 84.

Standstill function: to avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Light Control does not pivot toward the driver's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Lamps

86

In reverse, the Adaptive Light Control is not acti- vated.

Malfunction A message is displayed.

The Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or failed. Have the system checked as soon as pos- sible.

High beams/ roadside parking lamps

1 Turn signals/roadside parking lamps

2 Switching on high beams

3 Switching off high beams/headlamp flasher

Roadside parking lamps, left or right The vehicle can be illuminated on one side for parking. Comply with local regulations when doing so.

Switching on After parking the vehicle, press and hold the lever up or down, arrow 1.

The roadside parking lamps drain the bat- tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for

unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat- tery might not have enough power to start the engine.<

Switching off Press the lever up or down to the pressure point.

Front fog lamps

Turn on front fog lamps: Press the switch.

To switch them off, press the switch upward or downward again.

Front fog lamps The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The green indicator lamp lights up when the fog lamps are switched on.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fog lamps are switched off when you activate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams.

If the automatic headlamp control is acti- vated, the low beams will come on auto-

matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<

Instrument lighting You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the parking lamps or the low beams are on. The intensity of the brightness changes up to a predetermined end point, and then decreases.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Lamps CONTROLS

87

Adjusting brightness > Briefly press button: brightness changes in

stages.

> Press and hold the button. Brightness changes in a continuous manner.

Interior lamps The interior lamps, the footwell lamps, the entry lamps, and the cargo area lamp are controlled automatically.

To reduce the drain on the battery, a short while after the ignition is switched off,

refer to Start/Stop button on page 50, all lights in the vehicle's passenger compartment are switched off.<

Switching interior lamps on/off manually

To switch the interior lamps on/off.

Press the switch.

To switch off the interior lamps permanently, press the switch for about 3 seconds.

Reading lamps Reading lamps are provided in the front and rear adjacent to the interior lamps.

To switch the reading lamps on and off.

In the front: press the switch.

In the rear: press the button.

Ambient lighting

The color and brightness of the ambient lighting can be changed.

> Press the switch forward. The color changes in stages.

> Press the switch toward the rear. The brightness changes in stages.

Intermediate settings and colors are possible.

For a continuous color change in the ambient lighting, press and hold the

switch forward for longer than 10 seconds.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Climate

88

Climate

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described

that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Air conditioner

1 Air flow rate

2 Cooling function

3 Recirculated-air mode

4 Temperature

5 Rear window defroster

6 Air distribution

7 Windshield heating

Air flow rate Adjust the air flow rate. The higher the rate, the more effective the heating or cooling will be.

The air flow rate is lowered or switched off entirely to reduce the drain on the battery.

Switching the system on/off Turn the air flow rate rotary switch to 0. Blower and air conditioner are completely switched off and the air supply is cut off.

Set any desired air flow rate to switch on the air conditioner.

Cooling function When the cooling function is on, the air is cooled, dried, then reheated according to the temper-

ature setting. The passenger compartment can only be cooled while the engine is running.

The cooling function helps prevent condensa- tion on the windows or removes it quickly.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started.

To cool the air more quickly and intensely when the external temperature is high,

you can switch on the recirculated-air mode.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Climate CONTROLS

89

Recirculated-air mode If the air outside the car has an unpleasant odor or contains pollut- ants, shut off the supply to the inte-

rior of the car temporarily. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

If the windows fog in recirculated-air mode, switch off the recirculated-air mode and increase the air volume if necessary. Ensure that air can flow onto the windshield.

The recirculated-air mode is automatically deac- tivated at low outside temperatures.

The recirculated-air mode should not be used over an extended period of time;

otherwise, the air quality in the passenger com- partment will deteriorate continuously.<

Temperature Turn upward, red, to increase the temper- ature. Turn downward, blue, to decrease the temperature.

Rear window defroster The defroster is switched off auto- matically after a certain time.

The rear window heating is lowered or switched off entirely to reduce the drain on the battery.

Air distribution Direct the flow of air to the windows , to the upper body area or to the footwell . Intermediate settings are possible.

Windshield heating The windshield heating is switched off automatically after a short time.

The front window heating is low- ered or switched off entirely to reduce the drain on the battery.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation 1. Set air flow rate to the maximum level.

2. Set air distribution to position . Condensation is removed from the windows more quickly when the cooling function is also activated.

3. Set to the highest temperature, red.

4. Deactivate recirculated-air mode.

5. Turn on windshield heating if necessary.

6. Turn on rear window defroster if necessary.

Microfilter The microfilter captures dust and pollen. The microfilter is changed by your MINI dealer dur- ing routine maintenance work.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Climate

90

Automatic climate control

1 Air flow rate, manual

2 AUTO program

3 Recirculated-air mode

4 Maximum cooling

5 Air distribution, manual

6 Temperature

7 Defrosting windows and removing conden- sation

8 Cooling function

9 Rear window defroster

10 Windshield heating

Comfortable interior climate AUTO program 2 offers the ideal air distribution and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. All you need to do is select an interior temperature which is comfort- able for you.

The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings.

Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile set- tings on page 27.

Air flow rate, manual Press the button to reduce air flow. Press the + button to increase it.

You can reactivate the automatic mode for the air flow rate with the AUTO button.

The air flow rate is lowered or switched off entirely to reduce the drain on the battery. The display remains the same.

Switching the system on/off Reduce the air flow by pressing the button repeatedly until the system is switched off. All displays go out.

Press the AUTO button to switch the automatic climate control back on.

AUTO program The AUTO program adjusts the air distribution to the windshield and

side windows, toward the upper body area and into the footwell for you. The air flow rate and your temperature specifications will be adapted to outside influences in accordance with sea- sonal changes, e.g. sunlight.

The cooling function is automatically switched on along with the AUTO program.

The program is switched off if the air distribution is manually adjusted or if the button is pressed again.

Recirculated-air mode If the air outside the car has an unpleasant odor or contains pollut- ants, shut off the supply to the inte-

rior of the car temporarily. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Climate CONTROLS

91

If condensation starts to form on the inside win- dow surfaces, press the AUTO button or switch off the recirculated-air mode and, if necessary, increase the air flow rate. Ensure that air can flow onto the windshield.

The recirculated-air mode is automatically deac- tivated at low outside temperatures.

The recirculated-air mode should not be used over an extended period of time;

otherwise, the air quality in the passenger com- partment will deteriorate continuously.<

Maximum cooling The automatic climate control switches to the lowest tempera- ture, high airflow and the recircu-

lated-air mode.

For maximum cooling, open the air vents for the upper body area.

The air is cooled as quickly as possible:

> For an outside temperature of more than 327/06

> While the motor is running.

Air distribution, manual The flow of air is directed to the windows, to the upper body area or to the footwell as selected.

You can switch the automatic air distribution back on by pressing the AUTO but- ton.

Temperature Set the desired temperature individually.

The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible regardless of the season, using maximum

cooling or heating power if necessary, and then maintains it.

If you switch between different tempera- ture settings in quick succession, the auto-

matic climate control does not have enough time to achieve the set temperature.<

Rear window defroster The defroster is switched off auto- matically after a certain time. Depending on your vehicle's equip- ment, the upper wires serve as an

antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Quickly removes ice and condensa- tion from the windshield and front side windows. For this purpose, also switch on the

cooling function. The windshield heating is switched on automat- ically.

Windshield heating The windshield heating is switched off automatically after a certain time.

Cooling function

When the cooling function is on, the air is cooled, dried, then reheated according to the temper- ature setting. The passenger com- partment can only be cooled while

the engine is running.

The cooling function helps prevent condensa- tion on the windows or removes it quickly.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started. The recirculated-air mode may be switched on auto- matically.

When the AUTO button is pressed, the cooling function switches on automatically.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter captures dust and pollen. The activated-charcoal filter provides additional pro- tection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Climate

92

outside air. Your MINI dealer replaces this com- bined filter as a standard part of your scheduled maintenance. You can call up further information in the service requirements display, page 64.

Ventilation

1 Knob for continuous opening and closing

2 Jet for direction of air flow

Opening/closing Turn the knob.

Direction of air flow Swivel the entire jet.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories CONTROLS

93

Practical interior accessories

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Integrated universal remote control

The concept By using the Integrated universal remote con- trol, up to 3 functions of remote controlled devices, e.g., garage door openers or lighting systems, can be operated. As a result, the uni- versal remote control can replace up to 3 differ- ent remote controls. To operate, the buttons on the rearview mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. For programming, the remote control for each device is needed.

To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-

grated universal remote control, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the travel range of the device. Comply also with the safety instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter.<

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions as a safety precaution, page.

Checking compatibility Depending on your vehicle's equip- ment, the glove compartment can be ventilated and, if the cooling function is

switched on, can also be cooled.

For additional information, please contact your MINI dealer or call: 1-800-355-3515.

A list of compatible remote controls is available on the Internet at www.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

Operating elements on the rearview mirror

1 LED

2 Memory buttons

3 Hand-held transmitter

Programming

General information 1. Switch on ignition.

2. Initial startup:

Press and hold the right and left buttons on the rearview mirror for approx. 20 seconds until the LED on the rearview mirror starts flashing quickly. All the programming for the buttons on the rearview mirror is deleted.

3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 1 in/2.5 cm to 3 in/8 cm from the buttons on the rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the hand- held transmitter.

4. Press both the desired function on the remote and the button to be programmed on the rearview mirror at the same time. The LED flashes slowly at first.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Practical interior accessories

94

5. As soon as the LED flashes rapidly, release both buttons. The quick flashing indicates that the button on the rearview mirror has been programmed.

If the LED does not flash rapidly after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance between the rearview mirror and hand-held transmitter and repeat this step. Several attempts at different distances may be nec- essary. Wait at least 15 seconds before each attempt.

Canada: if the programming was interrupted by the hand-held transmitter, press and hold the memory button and press the button on the hand-held transmitter for 2 seconds and release several times.

6. To program other functions on other but- tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

You can operate the system with the engine running or with the ignition switched on.

Special features of hopping-code transmitter systems If the device cannot be operated after being programmed repeatedly, then check if the device to be operated is equipped with a hop- ping-code system. In addition, check in the operating instructions for the device or press the programmed button on the rearview mirror for a longer period of time. If the LED on the rearview mirror first flashes quickly and then is on for 2 seconds, then the device is equipped with a hopping-code system. The flashing and the LED being on repeats itself for approx. 20 seconds.

In addition, for devices with hopping-code sys- tems, the integrated universal remote control and the device must be synchronized.

Information about synchronizing can be found in the operating instructions for the device to be set.

Programming will be easier with the aid of a sec- ond person.

Synchronizing:

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.

Do not exceed the 164 ft/50 m range of the remote-controlled device.

2. Program the particular button on the rear- view mirrors as described.

3. Find and press the button for synchronizing the device to be set. There remain approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Press and hold the programmed button on the rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and then release. Repeat this step, possibly up to three times, to complete the synchro- nization. After the synchronization is com- pleted, the programmed function is imple- mented.

To reprogram individual buttons 1. Switch on ignition.

2. Press and hold the button to be pro- grammed on the rearview mirror.

3. As soon as the LED on the rearview mirror starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter of the device to be operated approx. 1 in/2.5 cm to 3 in/8 cm from the buttons on the rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the hand-held trans- mitter.

4. Press and also hold the button with the desired function on the hand-held transmit- ter.

5. As soon as the LED on the rearview mirror starts blinking faster, release both buttons. The quick flashing indicates that the button on the rearview mirror has been pro- grammed. The device can now be operated using the button on the rearview mirror.

Canada: if the LED is not flashing rapidly after 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step or, if the programming was interrupted by the hand-held transmitter, press and hold the memory button and

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories CONTROLS

95

press the button on the hand-held transmit- ter for 2 seconds and release several times.

Operation Before using the integrated universal remote control, always inspect the imme-

diate area to make certain that no people, ani- mals or objects are within the travel range of the device. Comply also with the safety instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter.<

The device, for example a garage door, can be operated while the engine is running or when the ignition is on by using the button on the rearview mirror. In addition, while within the reception range of the device, press the button until the function is deleted. The LED on the rearview mirror is constantly on while the signal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions Press and hold the right and left buttons on the rearview mirror for approx. 20 seconds until the LED on the rearview mirror starts flashing quickly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions can not be deleted individually.

Digital compass

1 Setting button on the back of the mirror

2 Display

The cardinal or ordinal direction in which the vehicle is moving is shown on the display.

Operating principle By pressing the setting button with a thin, sharp object, e.g., a pen or a similar object, various functions can be called up. The following setting options are displayed one after the other, depending on how long the setting button is pressed down:

> Quick press: display switches on/off

> 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting

> 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration

> 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand drive setting

> 12 to 15 seconds: setting the language

Setting the compass zones Set the appropriate compass zone on your vehi- cle so that the compass operates properly; see world map with compass zones.

To set the compass zones, press the setting but- ton for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of the compass zones that have been set are shown on the display.

To change the zone setting, quickly press the setting button as often as necessary until the number of the compass zone for your location is displayed.

The compass is again ready to use after approx. 10 seconds.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Practical interior accessories

96

Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations:

> The incorrect cardinal direction is displayed.

> The direction that is displayed does not change even though the driving direction changes.

> Not all cardinal directions are displayed.

Procedure 1. Make sure that there are no large metal

objects or overhead power lines near your vehicle, and that you have enough space to drive in circles.

2. Set the compass zone that currently applies.

3. Press the setting button approx. 6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in a complete circle at a maximum speed of 4 mph/7 km/h. If the calibration is successful, the C will be replaced by the directions.

Setting right/left-hand drive Your digital compass is already set to right-hand drive or left-hand drive at the factory, depend- ing upon your vehicle.

Setting the language You can set the language on the display:

Press the setting button for approx. 12-13 sec- onds. Briefly press the setting button again to switch between English "E" and German "O".

The setting is automatically stored after approx. 10 seconds.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories CONTROLS

97

Glove compartment

Opening

Pull the handle to open the cover. The light in the glove compartment comes on.

Closing Fold cover up.

To prevent injury in the event of an acci- dent, close the glove compartment after

use while the vehicle is being driven.<

Ventilation Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the glove compartment can be ventilated and, if the cooling function is switched on, can also be cooled.

Opening Rotate the switch in the direction of the arrow.

Closing Rotate the switch in the opposite direction of the arrow until it is in the vertical position.

Depending on the temperature setting of the air conditioner or the automatic climate control, high temperatures may result in the glove com- partment.

USB interface for data transfer For the updating of navigation data, refer to page 118 on USB media via the USB interface in the glove box.

Observe the following when connecting:

> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB interface.

> Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface.

> Do not connect USB hard drives.

> Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices.

Connection for external audio device You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the vehicle's speaker system, refer to the Enter- tainment chapter starting on page 153.

Center armrest The center armrest between the front seats con- tains either a compartment or the cover for the snap-in adapter, see page 174.

In the center armrest between the back seats, there is a storage compartment.

In addition, do not position high accessory parts directly on the center armrest on the rail; other- wise they could be damaged when the center armrest is opened or closed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Practical interior accessories

98

Center armrest front

Opening Press the button, arrow, and lift the cover.

Center armrest rear

Removing The center armrest in the rear can be removed to increase the amount of storage room.

1. Turn handwheel counterclockwise until it reaches the stop, arrow 1.

2. Push center armrest in the base plate gently towards the back, arrow 2.

3. Raise the armrest in front and swing out.

Installing 1. Insert center armrest in the back into the

rear recess of the base plate, arrow 1.

2. Push to rear and swing down in front, arrow 2.

3. Push center armrest in the base plate for- ward.

4. Tighten handwheel by turning clockwise.

Ensure that the center armrest engages properly when it is installed; otherwise, it may be dam- aged, for example, during braking maneuvers.

Storage compartments Do not put any unsecured objects into the interior of the vehicle; otherwise these

may endanger the occupants, e.g., during brak- ing and evasive maneuvers.<

Do not use the instrument panel as a shelf, for example with non-slip mats; other-

wise, it could be damaged.<

In the vehicle interior Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you will find storage compartments in the front and rear doors and in the center console. Pockets are provided on the backrest rear pan- els of the front seats.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories CONTROLS

99

Center Rail Various accessory parts can be attached to the Center Rail and installed in different positions.

Do not use accessory parts near the hand brake; otherwise these could be damaged

when the hand brake lever is operated.<

Smartphone holder The upper part of the smartphone holder can be rotated by 360.

When installing in the front of the rail, make sure that there is sufficient space, e.g., away from the seat; otherwise, damage may be caused when rotating.

1. Pull the lever 1 up to unlock the mounts.

2. First install the smartphone on the Center Rail with the mounts 2.

3. To secure, push lever 1 down. Ensure that the lever can lock it properly.

When connecting a smartphone to the USB audio interface, see page 154, guide the con- nection cable under the smartphone holder.

Base plate On the base plate, various accessories can be attached, such as cup holders, holders for sun- glasses and cell phone holders.

Inserting base plate The lever 3 can be locked in three positions.

0 Locking

1 Sliding along the rail

2 Inserting base plate

For inserting, move the lever into position 2.

Sliding and locking 1. Push lever 3 into position 1.

2. Slide the base plate.

3. Push lever 3 down into position 0. Make sure not to press the lever beyond the resistance point.

The base plate is fixed in position.

Lock the base plate in place before driv- ing; otherwise, injuries may result in the

event of an accident.<

Example: cupholder Put cupholder in the back between the rear seats and push in.

Installing cupholder 1. Lock base plate in place if necessary, refer to

Sliding and locking.

2. Pull the lever 6 up to unlock the mounts.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CONTROLS Practical interior accessories

100

3. First insert the cupholder into the front mounts 4 and then snap it into the rear mounts 5.

Make sure that the lever 6 is situated opposite the mount 4.<

Clothes hooks There are clothes hooks on the grab handles in the rear passenger compartment.

Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver's view. Do not

hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise, they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<

In the cargo area Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you have the following storage options:

> Storage compartment under the flat load floor

> Bag holder on the support for the cargo area cover

Cupholders and ashtray

Cupholders Use lightweight, nonbreakable containers and do not transport hot beverages. Oth-

erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Do not push unsuitable containers forcibly into the cupholder. Otherwise, you may

damage it.<

Additional cupholders can be attached to the Center Rail in the rear passenger compartment.

Ashtray The ashtray is located in one of the cupholders in the center console.

Emptying Remove the entire ashtray.

Lighter

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.

The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops back out.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories CONTROLS

101

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in

other areas could result in burns. When leaving the car, always remove the key so that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<

Connecting electrical appliances In your MINI, when the engine is running or if the ignition is switched on, you can use electrical devices such as flashlights, car vacuum cleaners, etc., up to approx. 140 watts at 12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets is available. Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

Do not connect battery chargers to the sockets installed in the vehicle at the fac-

tory; otherwise you may cause damage to the vehicle.<

Place the cigarette lighter or charger socket cover back in position after use;

otherwise, items that fall into the cigarette lighter socket or charger socket can cause a short circuit.<

Cigarette lighter socket Remove the lighter or cover from the socket.

Sockets

In the rear passenger compartment

Pull out the cover.

In the cargo area MINI Countryman:

Pull out the cover.

MINI Paceman:

Pull out the cover.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Drive Me.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

NAVIGATION

Entertainment

COMMUNICATIONS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

DRIVING TIPS

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

104

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Break-in period Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to each other. Please follow the instructions below in order to achieve the optimal service life and economy of operation for your vehicle.

Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do not exceed the following:

> Gasoline engine 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/160 km/h

Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode.

After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually increased.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac- tion potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in period.

Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Ground clearance When driving, make sure that there is suf- ficient ground clearance, such as when

entering underground parking garages, driving over curbs or when driving in winter; otherwise damage to the vehicle may result.<

Closing tailgate Only drive with the tailgate closed. Failure to do so may endanger passengers or

other road users or may damage the vehicle in the event of an accident or a braking and eva- sive maneuver. In addition, exhaust gas may flow into the passenger compartment.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

105

If special circumstances make it absolutely nec- essary to drive with the tailgate open:

1. Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

2. Switch off recirculated-air mode and switch the airflow control of the air conditioner or automatic climate control to high, refer to page 88 or 90.

Hot exhaust system As in all vehicles, extremely high tempera- tures are generated on the exhaust sys-

tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed adjacent to various sections of the exhaust sys- tem, and never apply undercoating to them. When driving, standing at idle and while park- ing, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flamma- ble materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the risk of seri- ous personal injuries and property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise, there is a risk of burns.<

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge

of water can form between tires and road sur- face. This situation, known as hydroplaning, can cause partial or complete loss of tire contact with the road surface, so that the car cannot be steered or braked properly.<

The risk of hydroplaning increases with declining tread depth on the tires, refer also to Tread depth on page 211.

Driving through water Drive through water on the road only if it is not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only

at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.<

Parking brake on inclines On inclines, do not hold the vehicle with the clutch; use the parking brake. Other-

wise, greater clutch wear will result.<

For information on driving off using Hill Assist, refer to page 74.

Braking safely Your MINI is equipped with ABS. If you are in a situation which requires full braking, it is best to brake using maximum brake pressure. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a mini- mum of steering effort.

The pulsation of the brake pedal, together with the sound of hydraulic regulation, indicates that ABS is functioning properly.

Objects in the movement range of the pedals

Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects out of the movement range of the pedals;

otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the pedals during driving. Do not place additional floor mats onto an existing one or onto other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be appropri- ately fastened. Make sure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they have been removed, e.g. for cleaning.<

Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that. Then full braking force will be immediately avail- able when it is needed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

106

Hills To prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system,

drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Even light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces- sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system. Downshift- ing in manual mode of the automatic transmis- sion, page 54.

Never drive with the clutch held down, with the transmission in neutral or with

the engine switched off; otherwise, engine brak- ing action will not be present or there will be no power assistance to the brakes or steering. Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area around the pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be impaired.<

Corrosion on brake rotors When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.

When the vehicle is parked Condensation forms while the automatic climate control is in operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.

In the MINI Cooper S, the coolant pump may continue to run for some time after the engine is switched off. This will generate noise in the engine compartment.

Cargo loading To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never over-

load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over- heating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. The ultimate result can assume the form of a sudden blowout.<

Avoid fluid spills in the cargo area as they could damage the vehicle.<

Expanding cargo area

Cargo area cover Do not place any objects on the cover; otherwise, they could endanger the car's

occupants, e.g. in the case of braking or sudden swerving, or they may damage the cover.<

When you open the tailgate, the roll-up cover is raised.

To load bulky luggage, the cover can be removed.

1. Unhook the lift straps from the tailgate.

2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull it rearward out of the bracket, arrow 2.

MINI Countryman:

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

107

MINI Paceman:

MINI Countryman: rear seat backrest Before folding down the rear seat back- rests, make sure that the range of motion

for the backrests is unobstructed. Particularly with a folded down middle section, make sure that there is no one within the range of motion of the backrest and that no one reaches into that region. Otherwise, injury or damage can result.<

To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,

observe the safety belt information on page 42.<

5-seater: the rear seat back is divided in the fol- lowing proportions: 40-20-40.

When the outer rear seat backs are folded down, no one may sit in the middle posi-

tion.<

If necessary, remove the third head restraint, refer to Removing head restraints, page 41. Open the center belt and insert in the take-up on the headliner, see page 43.

Expand the cargo area by raising the rear seat backrests to a steeper angle.

The backrests can be adjusted as needed in 10 stages between a comfort position and a transport position or can be folded down.

In the comfort position, the backrests are as far back as possible; in the transport position, they are in an approximately vertical position.

Before installing a child restraint system, observe the instructions starting on page 46.

1. Hold on to the backrest near the top, for example on the headrest, and pull on the loop, arrow.

2. Lock backrest in the desired position or fold down.

Folding the backrests back into position When folding the backrest, make sure that the lock properly engages. Otherwise, for

example during braking and avoidance maneu- vers, cargo can be thrown into the interior and endanger the occupants.<

If the rear seat backrests are positioned at a steeper angle, do not install child

restraint systems in the rear of the vehicle as their protective features may be ineffective.<

When backrests are folded back from the folded-down position, they lock in the transport position.

To set the desired backrest angle or a comfort- able position, pull the loop forward and adjust the backrest.

MINI Paceman: rear seat backrest Before folding down the rear seat back- rests, make sure that the range of motion

for the backrests is unobstructed; otherwise, injury or damage can result.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

108

1. Pull on the loop, refer to arrow. The backrest is unlocked.

2. Fold the backrest forward.

Folding the backrests back into position Hold the backrest in the upper region, e.g. by the head restraint, and fold it back into position.

When folding the backrest, make sure that the lock properly engages. Otherwise, for

example during braking and avoidance maneu- vers, cargo can be thrown into the interior and endanger the occupants.<

MINI Countryman: cargo area privacy screen Between the cargo area and the rear seat back- rest, there is a cargo area privacy screen. It can be folded down and used as a loading platform.

When the rear seat backrests are folded down, do not fold the privacy screen

upright. In an accident, cargo could fold down the privacy screen and damage it.<

Folding down the privacy screen 1. If necessary, remove the cargo area cover,

refer to page 106.

2. Fold the privacy screen up and to the rear, arrow 1.

3. Release the locking mechanisms on the left and right sides, arrows 2.

4. Grasp the outer sides of the privacy screen and guide it downward.

Do not exceed the maximum load of 330 lbs/150 kg of the privacy screen when

it is in folded down into the loading platform position; otherwise, damage may occur.<

Folding the privacy screen forward 1. Fold down rear seat backrests.

2. Unlock privacy screen, see above.

3. Grasp the outer sides of the privacy screen and guide it forward onto the folded-down rear seat backrests.

Removing 1. Removing cargo area cover, page 106.

2. Fold the privacy screen up and to the rear and unlock it, refer to Folding the privacy screen forward.

3. Remove it from the guides on the cargo area floor, arrows, and remove the privacy screen.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

109

Flat load floor Do not exceed a maximum load of 330 lbs/150 kg on the load floor; other-

wise, damage may result.<

Access to the storage space Under the load floor, there is storage space, e.g., for the cargo net.

1. Reach into the recess, arrow 1, at the back edge of the load floor.

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

2. Lift up the pull-out floor panel at the rear, arrow 1 and fold it forward, arrow 2.

Before closing the tailgate, put the load floor back on the cargo area floor.

Removing If necessary, the load floor can be removed.

1. Fold load floor together.

2. Pull the load floor back slightly out of the take-up.

3. Then take it out toward the top.

The folded together load floor can be placed into the luggage compartment.

MINI Countryman: cargo net Ensure that the cargo net is firmly attached; otherwise, injuries may occur.<

Before installing 1. Remove the pouch with the cargo net from

the storage compartment under the pull-out floor panel in the cargo area.

2. Remove the cargo net from the pouch, then unroll and unfold it.

After use, fold the cargo net together, roll it back up in the same way, and place it in the pouch so that it can be stowed under the floor panel again. When doing so, make sure that hooks and tensioning buckles do not rest against the rod elements.

3. Unfold the cargo net until the rod elements snap into place.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

110

Installing behind the front seats

1. If necessary, remove the cargo area cover.

2. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to Expanding cargo area.

3. Insert each cargo net mounting pin all the way into its respective front mount in the headliner, arrow 1, and push it forward.

4. Attach the hook, arrow 2, at the bottom of each retaining strap to the respective eye on the vehicle floor.

5. Lash the cargo net securely. To do so, tighten the retaining straps at the tensioning buckles.

Removing When removing and stowing the cargo net, pro- ceed in the reverse sequence.

To fold closed, press the release button, arrow.

MINI Countryman: bag holders

Holders on the left and right side of the support for the cargo area cover, arrow, e.g. for hanging shopping bags or storage bags.

Only hang light shopping bags or suitable items on the holders. Otherwise, this may

create a hazard due to flying objects, for exam- ple in the event of braking and evasive maneu- vers. Transport heavy luggage only if it is appropri- ately secured in the cargo area.<

Determining cargo limit

1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, this could damage the vehicle and produce unstable vehicle operating conditions.<

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX pounds or YYY kilograms.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

111

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be four 150 lb- pas- sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs: 1,400 lbs minus 750 lbs = 650 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load 4-seater:

5-seater:

The permissible load is the sum of the occu- pants' weights and the weight of the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.

Stowing cargo > Position heavy objects as low and as far for-

ward as possible, ideally directly behind the rear seat backrests.

> Cover sharp edges and corners.

> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each safety belt in the respective opposite buckle.

> Do not stack higher than the top edge of the backrests.

> Use the cargo net, refer to page 109. Ensure that no objects can penetrate through the net.

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

112

Securing cargo MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

> Secure smaller and lighter items using retaining or draw straps.

> Heavy-duty cargo straps for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your MINI dealer.

> These cargo straps are fastened using eight securing eyes.

Two of them are located on the side wall, arrows 1, of the cargo area.

Two of them are located on the rear wall, arrows 2, of the cargo area.

To use the lower lashing eyes, raise or remove the pull-out floor panel.

Comply with the information enclosed with the load-securing devices.

Always position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endan-

ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden braking or swerves are necessary. Do not exceed the approved gross vehicle weight and axle loads, page 248; otherwise, the

vehicle's operating safety is no longer assured and the vehicle will not be in compliance with the construction and use regulations. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car, since they could be thrown around, for example as a result of heavy braking, sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu- pants. Do not secure cargo using the fastening points for the tether strap, page 47; they may become damaged.<

Roof-mounted luggage rack A special rack system is available as an option for your MINI. Your MINI dealer will be glad to advise you. Comply with the installation instruc- tions supplied with the rack system.

Loading roof-mounted luggage rack Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.

You can find more information under Weights in the technical specifications.

The roof load must be distributed uniformly and should not be too large in area. Heavy items should always be placed at the bottom.

When loading, make sure that there is sufficient space for the movement of the glass roof.

Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip.

Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers, and take corners gently.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

113

Rear luggage rack A special rear-mounted luggage rack is available as an optional accessory. It does not require a trailer hitch.

Please comply with the precautions included with the installation instructions.

Mounting points MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

The mounting points are located under the cov- ers in the bumper. Remove the covers, refer to page 238.

Loading rear luggage rack When loading, make sure that you do not exceed the approved gross vehicle weight and axle loads.

You can find more information under Weights in the technical specifications.

Saving fuel

General information Your vehicle incorporates numerous technolo- gies for reducing fuel consumption and emis- sions.

Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif- ferent factors. Fuel consumption and environ- mental pollution are affected by various actions, the manner of driving and regular maintenance.

Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts no longer in use Attached parts on the vehicle affect its aerody- namics and increase fuel consumption.

Closing windows Open windows increase air resistance and therefore fuel consumption.

Check tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if necessary, correct tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before start- ing on a long trip.

Low inflation pressure increases rolling resis- tance and thus leads to greater fuel consump- tion and tire wear.

Drive off immediately Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its oper- ating temperature.

Think ahead while driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking, by maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead.

Looking-ahead and smooth driving reduces fuel consumption.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving

114

Avoid high engine speeds Use first gear only for driving off. In second and higher gears, accelerate smoothly to a suitable engine and road speed. In doing so, avoid high engine speeds and shift up early.

When you reach your desired traveling speed, shift to the highest suitable gear and drive at constant speed.

As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

Coasting When approaching a red traffic light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the car roll to a stop in the highest gear possible.

On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast in a suitable gear.

Fuel supply is shut off automatically when the vehicle is coasting.

Switch off the engine during lengthy stops Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic jams.

Switch off any features that are not currently required Features such as air conditioning, seat heaters and the rear window defroster require a great deal of energy and result in greater fuel con- sumption, especially in city driving and during Stop & Go operation. For this reason, switch off these features if they are not really needed.

Have the vehicle serviced Have your vehicle serviced regularly to achieve good economy and a long vehicle life. The man- ufacturer of your MINI recommends having the vehicle serviced by a MINI dealer. Also note the MINI Maintenance System, page 218.

Driving on poor roads Your MINI with ALL4 drive is at home on any type of street or road. It combines an all-wheel drive system with the advantages of a normal passenger car.

Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as other- wise the vehicle may be damaged.<

When you are driving on poor roads, there are a few points which you should strictly observe for your own safety, for that of your passengers, and for the safety of the vehicle:

> Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before beginning to drive and do not take risks under any circumstances.

> Adapt your speed to road conditions. The steeper and rougher the road surface is, the lower the speed should be.

> When driving on very steep uphill or down- hill grades, make sure in advance that the engine oil and coolant levels are close to the maximum mark, refer to page 215.

> While driving, watch carefully for obstacles such as rocks or holes. Try to avoid these obstacles whenever possible.

> Make sure that the undercarriage does not touch the ground, for example on hilltops and bumpy roads. The ground clearance of the vehicle is a maximum of approx. 6.0 in/ 15 cm. Please note that the ground clear- ance can vary depending on loading and the driving conditions of the vehicle.

> Only drive through road surface water up to a maximum water depth of 1 ft/30 cm and only at walking speed; do not remain sta- tionary.

> After driving through water at low speed, lightly press the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes and to prevent the braking effect from being reduced by wetness.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS

115

> Depending on the condition of the surface, it may be practical to briefly activate DTC, refer to DTC Dynamic Traction Control on page 73.

> If the drive wheels spin on one side, depress the accelerator pedal sufficiently so that the driving stability control systems can distrib- ute the drive forces to the individual wheels.

After driving on poor roads, please observe the following points to maintain the driving safety of the vehicle:

> Clean the coarsest dirt from the body.

> Clean mud, snow, ice, etc. from the wheels and tires and check the tires for damage.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Follow Me.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

Entertainment

COMMUNICATIONS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

NAVIGATION

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

NAVIGATION Navigation system

118

Navigation system

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information The navigation system can determine the pre- cise position of the vehicle, with the aid of satel- lites and vehicle sensors, and can reliably guide you to every entered destination.

Enter data only with the vehicle station- ary, and always give priority to the appli-

cable traffic regulations in the event of any con- tradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.<

Selecting navigation 1. "Navigation"

During route guidance, an arrow view or a map view is displayed on the onboard computer.

Navigation data

Information on navigation data 1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Navigation system version"

Information about the data version is displayed.

Updating the navigation data

General information Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated.

You may obtain current navigation data and the enabling code at your MINI dealer.

Updating the data can take several hours, depending on the volume of data.

> Update data while driving to reduce the drain on the battery.

> The update is resumed automatically when a trip is continued after an interruption.

> You can inquire as to the status of the update.

> The data are stored in the vehicle.

> After the updating process is complete, the system restarts.

> The medium with the navigation data can be removed after the update.

To update 1. Depending on equipment: insert USB stor-

age device with navigation data

> into the USB interface in the glove com- partment

> into the USB audio interface, refer to page 154.

2. Follow the instructions on the onboard com- puter.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Navigation system NAVIGATION

119

3. Enter the activation code of the USB storage device.

4. Begin driving.

The update begins after the activation code is entered. When the update is completed, the sys- tem restarts.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

NAVIGATION Destination entry

120

Destination entry

General information In entering your destination you can select from among the following options:

> Manual destination entry, see below

> Selecting destination from address book, page 122

> Last destinations, page 123

> Special destinations, refer to page 124

> Entering the destination via map, refer to page 125

> Selecting home address, refer to page 123

> Entering destination via voice, page 126

After selecting your destination you can proceed to start the route guidance, page 129.

Manual destination entry To make it easier to enter town/city names and street names, you are supported with the word- match principle, refer to page 128. This makes it possible to enter different spellings and com- pletes your entry automatically so that stored town/city names and street names can be accessed quickly.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

The system also supports you with the following features:

> If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city.

> You can skip the entry of country and town/ city if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.

Entering a state/province 1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. Select "State/Province" or displayed country.

Entering a town/city 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or displayed

city.

2. Select letters, if necessary. A list of all towns/cities starting with this let- ter appears on the Control Display.

To delete letters:

> To delete individual numbers or letters: Turn the MINI joystick to highlight and press the MINI joystick.

> To delete all numbers or letters: Turn the MINI joystick to highlight and press and hold the MINI joystick.

3. If necessary, enter more letters. The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.

To enter spaces, if necessary: Select the symbol.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Destination entry NAVIGATION

121

4. If necessary, move the MINI joystick to the right and change to the list of towns and cit- ies and select a name.

Entering the postal code 1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or displayed

city.

2. Select the symbol.

3. Select the digits individually.

4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/ cities.

5. Highlight the postal code.

6. Select the zip code. The corresponding destination is displayed.

Entering street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or displayed street.

2. Enter the street and intersection the same way you entered the town/city.

If there are several streets with the same name:

1. Move the MINI joystick to the right to change to the list of street names.

2. Highlight street.

3. Select the street.

Alternative: entering street and house number 1. Select "Street" or displayed street.

2. Enter the street the same way you entered the town/city.

3. "House number"

4. Select the digits.

5. Change to the list of house numbers.

6. Select a house number or range of house numbers.

Entering a street without a destination town/city It is also possible to enter a street without enter- ing a destination town/city. In this case all streets of the entered country are offered for selection. The related town/city is displayed after the street name.

If a town/city has already been entered, this entry can be canceled. This may be practical if the desired street does not exist in the entered destination, because, for example, it belongs to another part of the town/city.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. Select "Street" or displayed street.

4. Change to the list of street names.

5. Select "In" with the currently displayed country.

6. Select the letters.

7. Change to the list of street names.

8. Highlight street.

9. Select the street.

Starting route guidance after entering the destination 1. "Accept destination"

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina- tion".

> Setting "Route preference", refer to page 129.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

NAVIGATION Destination entry

122

> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.", refer to page 124.

Address book To create contacts, refer to page 171 or page 188.

Selecting a destination from the address book 1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book" Contacts with addresses are displayed if these addresses have been checked as des- tinations.

If the contacts with addresses from the mobile phone are not displayed, they must first be checked as destinations, refer to page 173 or page 189.

3. Select a contact in the list or if so desired, using the "A-Z search".

4. If necessary, select "Business address" or "Home address".

Storing a destination in the address book Store the destination in the address book after entering the destination.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Guidance"

4. Open "Options".

5. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

6. Select an existing contact, if available.

7. Select "Business address" or "Home address".

8. Enter "Last name" and "First name" if you wish.

9. "Store in vehicle"

Storing the position Your current position can be stored in the address book.

1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position to contact".

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Destination entry NAVIGATION

123

4. Depending on the selection, select an exist- ing contact from the list or the type of address and enter the last and first name.

5. "Store in vehicle"

Editing or deleting an address 1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book"

3. Highlight the entry.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".

Using home address as destination The home address must be stored as a destina- tion. Refer to Defining a home address, page 172 or page 189.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Address book"

3. "Home"

4. "Start guidance"

Last destinations The last destinations are stored automatically. These destinations can be called up and used as a destination for route guidance.

Accessing last destinations 1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Select the destination.

4. "Start guidance"

Editing a destination Destinations can be edited, for example, to change the house number of an existing entry.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Highlight the destination.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Edit destination"

Deleting the last destinations 1. "Navigation"

2. "Last destinations"

3. Highlight the destination.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina- tions".

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

NAVIGATION Destination entry

124

Special destinations You can search for a special destination, e.g. a hotel or place of interest, and start route guid- ance to the corresponding location.

The scope of information provided depends on the particular set of naviga-

tion data you are using.<

Accessing search for special destinations 1. "Navigation"

2. Select "Points of Interest" search.

A-Z search 1. "A-Z search"

2. "Town/City"

3. "Category"

4. "Category details"

For some special destinations, it is possible to select several category details. Move the MINI joystick to the left to exit category details.

5. "Keyword"

6. Enter keyword.

A list of the special destinations is displayed.

7. Select the special destination.

8. Select the symbol.

9. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina- tion".

If several details are stored, then you can scroll through the pages.

If a phone number is available, a connection can be established, if desired.

Category search 1. "Category search"

2. "Search destination"

3. Select or enter town/city.

4. "Category"

5. Select category.

6. "Category details"

For some special destinations, it is possible to select several category details. Move the MINI joystick to the left to exit category details.

7. "Start search" A list of the special destinations is displayed.

8. Select the special destination. Details are displayed.

9. Select the symbol.

10. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina- tion".

If several details are stored, then you can scroll through the pages. If a phone number is avail- able, a connection can be established, if desired.

Special destination location As you input the search destination, you can select from among various options.

> "At current location"

> "At destination"

> "At different location"

> With active route guidance: "Along route"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Destination entry NAVIGATION

125

Starting the search for special destinations 1. "Start search"

2. A list of the special destinations is displayed.

> "At current location" The special destinations are displayed in order of their distance and are displayed with a direction arrow pointing toward the destination.

> "At destination", "At different location", "Along route" The special destinations are displayed in order of their distance from the search point.

> Destinations of the selected category are displayed in the map display as symbols. The display depends on the map scale and the category.

3. Highlight special destination.

4. Select the special destination.

5. Select the symbol.

6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina- tion".

The distance from the destination is displayed.

Displaying special destinations in the map To display symbols of the special destinations in the map:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Display Points of Interest"

5. Select the settings.

Entering the destination via map If you only know the location of a destination or street, then you can enter the destination with the aid of the map.

Selecting the destination 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

The map shows the current position of the vehicle.

3. "Interactive map"

4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.

> Changing scale: turn the MINI joystick.

> Moving map: move the MINI joystick in the corresponding direction.

> Shifting map diagonally: move the MINI joystick in the corresponding direc- tion and turn the MINI joystick.

5. Press the MINI joystick to display additional menu items.

> Select the symbol: "Start guidance" or "Add as another destination".

> "Find points of interest": the search for special destinations is started.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

NAVIGATION Destination entry

126

Specifying the street If the system does not detect any street, then a street name in the vicinity or the coordinates of the destination are displayed.

Additional functions In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted and the visible map section can be shifted. You can also access other functions by pressing the MINI joystick:

> Select the symbol and "Start guid- ance" if necessary.

> "Exit interactive map"

> Map display

> "Display destination" The section of the map around the desti- nation is displayed.

> "Display current location" The section of the map around the cur- rent position is displayed.

> "Find points of interest", refer to page 124.

Entering destination via voice

General information > Voice activation system, refer to page 21.

> When entering a destination by voice, it is possible to switch between voice input and the onboard computer.

> Having the possible spoken commands read aloud: {Voice commands}

Saying the entries > Countries, towns/cities, streets, and inter-

sections can be either spoken aloud as an entire words or spelled in the system lan- guage, refer to page 69.

Example: to enter a destination in a US state as a complete word, the system language must be English.

> Spell the entry if the language of the area is different from the system language.

> Speak the letters smoothly and avoid exces- sive emphasis and pauses.

Entering a town/city The town/city can be spelled or entered as an entire word.

The methods of entry depend on the nav- igation data in use and the country and

language settings.<

2. Wait for the system prompt for the town/ city.

3. Say the name of the town/city or if neces- sary, spell at least the first three letters.

1. {City} or {Spell city}.

4. Select city/town:

> To select a recommended town/city: {Yes}

> Select other city/town: {New entry}

> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry }

> Spell the entry: {Spell city}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Destination entry NAVIGATION

127

Similar-sounding towns/cities that cannot be differentiated by the system are com-

piled in a separate list and displayed as a town/ city followed by three dots. If necessary, select this entry with {Yes}. Then select the desired city/town in this list.<

The town/city can also be selected from the list via the onboard computer: Turn the MINI joystick until the destination is selected, and press the MINI joystick.

Entering a street or intersection The street or intersection is entered in the same way as the town/city.

Entering house number Depending on the data in the navigation system, house numbers up to the number 2,000 can be entered:

Starting route guidance

Route guidance starts immediately.

Adding further intermediate destinations

Further intermediate destinations can be added.

Saving destination The destination is automatically added to the list of the last destinations.

Planning a trip with intermediate destinations

New trip Various intermediate destinations can be entered for a trip. The trip destination must be entered first, refer to Destination input, page 120.

Entering intermediate destinations A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for one trip.

1. "Navigation"

2. Select the type of destination entry and enter the intermediate destination.

3. "Add as another destination"

4. Select the location where the intermediate destination is to be inserted.

Starting the trip After entering all intermediate destinations: "Start guidance"

1. {House number}

2. Say the house number.

3. {Yes} to confirm the house number.

4. {Accept destination}

{Start guidance}

{Add as another destination}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

NAVIGATION Destination entry

128

Word-matching principle The system's word-matching principle makes it easier to enter the names of towns or streets. The system runs ongoing checks, comparing your destination entries with the data stored in the vehicle as the basis for instant response. The user benefits include:

> Town/city names can also be entered differ- ently from the official names if you use a form that is customary in other countries.

Example:

Instead of "Mnchen", you can also enter the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".

> When you are entering the names of towns/ cities and streets the system will complete them automatically as soon as enough let- ters are available to ensure unambiguous identification.

> The system offers only those letters for selection of name entries that are stored in the vehicle. The system will not accept non existent names and addresses.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Route guidance NAVIGATION

129

Route guidance

Starting route guidance 1. "Navigation"

2. "Enter address"

3. Select the destination.

4. "Accept destination"

5. "Start guidance"

> The route is displayed on the onboard com- puter.

> The distance to the destination/intermedi- ate destination and the estimated time of arrival are displayed in the map view.

> The arrow display is displayed on the onboard computer, if so desired.

Terminating route guidance

In the arrow or map view 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Stop guidance"

Continuing route guidance If the destination was not reached during the last trip, route guidance can be resumed.

"Resume guidance"

Route criteria

General information > You can influence the calculated route by

selecting certain criteria.

> Route criteria can be changed during desti- nation input and during route guidance.

> Street types are part of the navigation data and are taken into account in route plan- ning, e.g. avoiding highways.

> The proposed route can differ from personal experience.

> The settings are stored for the remote con- trol currently in use.

> Route guidance with traffic information, refer to page 135.

Changing route criteria 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Route preference"

4. Selecting a criterion:

> "Fast route": time-optimized route through a combination of the least possi- ble distance and stretches of road that allow rapid driving.

> "Efficient route": optimized combi- nation of the fastest and shortest possi- ble route.

> "Short route": short distance without taking time into account.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

NAVIGATION Route guidance

130

> "Alternative routes": suggestions of addi- tional alternate routes during route guid- ance.

5. Select additional route criteria, if desired. Where possible, the selected criteria will be avoided on the route.

> "Avoid highways": avoid highways where possible.

> "Avoid toll roads": avoid toll roads where possible.

> "Avoid ferries": avoid ferries where possi- ble.

The setting applies to the current route and to the planning of future routes.

If the route criteria "Avoid highways", "Avoid toll roads", or "Avoid ferries" are

selected, then this can prolong the calculation time for the route.<

Route There are various views of the route available during route guidance:

> Arrow display

> List of streets and towns/cities

> Map view, refer to page 131

Arrow display The following information is displayed during route guidance:

> Large arrow: current direction of travel.

> Street name of the currently traveled street.

> Small arrow: indicates the next change of direction.

> Intersection view.

> Lane information.

> Traffic information.

> Distance to the next change of direction.

> Street name of the next change of direction.

Lane information In the arrow display, the recommended lanes of multi-lane roads are each marked with a trian- gle.

> Filled triangle: optimum lane.

> Empty triangle: likewise possible lane. It can, however, also be possible to briefly make additional lane changes.

List of roads or towns/cities on the route If the route guidance has been started, then you can display a list of the roads and towns/cities on the route. The distance to be traveled and traffic bulletins are displayed for each segment of the route.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. Highlight a section.

Taking detours During route guidance, prompt the navigation system to bypass certain route segments. In doing so, you will specify how many kilometers to travel before returning to the original route.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Route guidance NAVIGATION

131

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. "New route for:"

4. Turn the MINI joystick: enter the desired mileage.

5. Press the MINI joystick.

Resuming the original route If the route section should no longer be bypassed:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. "New route for:"

4. "Remove blocking"

Recommended refueling The remaining driving range is calculated, and gas stations along the route are shown.

Even with the latest navigation data, informa- tion on various points of interest may have changed, e.g., service stations may not be in operation.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

3. "Recommended refuel" A list of gas stations is displayed.

4. Select a gas station.

5. Select the symbol.

6. "Start guidance": the guidance to the selected gas station is started.

"Add as another destination": the gas sta- tion is included in the route.

Map display

Displaying map view 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

Overview

1 Toolbar

2 Route segment with traffic obstruction

3 Road sign for traffic obstruction

4 Planned route

5 Current location

6 Upper status box

7 Lower status box

Lines on the map In the map view, streets and roads are depicted with different colors and lines according to their classification. Dotted lines represent railroad and ferry connections. National borders are depicted with thin lines.

Traffic obstructions Small triangles along the planned route identify route segments with traffic obstructions, depending on map scale. The direction of the tri- angles indicates the direction of the obstruction.

Road signs classify the obstructions.

> Red road sign: the obstruction relates to the planned route or direction of travel.

> Gray road sign: the obstruction does not relate to the planned route or direction of travel.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

NAVIGATION Route guidance

132

Traffic information, refer to page 133.

Planned route After route guidance is started, the planned route is displayed on the map.

Status boxes Show/hide: press the MINI joystick.

> Upper status box: time, phone details, and entertainment details.

> Lower status box: symbol for active route guidance, traffic information status, arrival time, and distance from destination.

Toolbar The following functions are available directly in the map view:

Changing map scale "Interactive map"

> Moving map: move the MINI joystick in the corresponding direction.

> Shifting map diagonally: move the MINI joystick in the corresponding direction and turn the MINI joystick.

Changing scale 1. Select the symbol and press the MINI joy-

stick.

2. Changing scale: turn the MINI joystick.

Automatic scaling of the map In the map view facing north, turn the MINI joystick in either direction until the scale AUTO is displayed. The map shows the entire path between the location and destination.

Settings for the map display The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

1. Open "Options".

2. "Settings"

> "Day/night mode" Select and adjust depending on light conditions. If "Traffic conditions/gray map" is activated, then this setting is not taken into account.

> "Traffic conditions/gray map" The map is optimized for displaying traf- fic bulletins. Symbols for the special des- tinations are no longer displayed.

Displaying arrow view in map display When route guidance is active, the arrow view can be displayed additionally on the right side of the map display.

1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

Symbol Function

Starting/stopping route guidance

Switching voice instruc- tions on/off

Changing route criteria or selecting route alternatives

Searching for special desti- nation

Displaying traffic bulletins

Interactive map

Adjusting map views

or arrow display

Changing scale

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Route guidance NAVIGATION

133

3. "Arrow display on map"

Destination guidance via voice instructions

Switching voice instructions on/off The voice instructions can be switched on and off during route guidance.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Select the symbol.

Repeating a voice instruction 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Highlight the symbol.

4. Press the MINI joystick twice.

Adjusting volume for voice instructions The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued.

1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if neces- sary.

2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.

This volume is independent of the volume of the audio sources.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Traffic information

Overview In many congested areas, you can receive traffic information that is transmitted by radio stations. The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic control centers and the traffic information is updated periodically. During route guidance, the traffic information relevant to the route you are planning to take is automatically shown and taken into account in route planning. Irrespective of whether route guidance is active, you can have the traffic infor- mation displayed in the map display or as an event list.

The symbol in the toolbar of the map view turns red if traffic information relates to the cal- culated route.

Real Time Traffic Information End-User Provisions Certain MINI models equipped with navigation have the capability to display real-time traffic information. If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply:

An End-User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-User is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein.

Symbol Meaning

Voice instructions switched on

Voice instructions switched off

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

NAVIGATION Route guidance

134

A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Chan- nel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Network") holds the rights to the traffic incident data and RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other method to reproduce, duplicate, republish, transmit or distribute in any way any portion of traffic incident data. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless MINI of North Amer- ica, LLC. ("MINI NA") and Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, damages, costs or other expenses that arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unau- thorized use of the traffic incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlaw- ful activities by you in connection herewith.

B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa- tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total Traffic Network, MINI NA, and their suppliers make no representations about content, traffic and road conditions, route usability, or speed.

C. The licensed material is provided to license "as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network, including, but not limited to, any and all third party providers of any of the licensed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit- ted by law, all warranties or representations with respect to the licensed material (including, with- out limitation, that the licensed material will be error-free, will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate), express, implied or statutory, including, without limita- tion, the implied warranties of merchantability, non-infringement fitness for a particular pur- pose, or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade.

D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor MINI NA will be liable to you for any indirect, special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental damages (including, without limitation, lost rev- enues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating to the same) arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or MINI NA are aware of the possibility of such

damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse- quential damages, so those particular limita- tions may not apply to you.

Switching reception of traffic information on/off 1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. Activate/deactivate "Receive Traffic Info".

Accessing traffic information 1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

"Traffic Info": traffic information for the sur- rounding area is listed here. The symbol turns red when traffic information relate to the calculated route.

3. "Traffic Info" First, traffic bulletins relating to the planned route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of their distance from the current vehicle posi- tion.

4. Select traffic information. "More information": display additional

information.

5. Scroll to the next or previous traffic informa- tion if desired.

Traffic bulletins in the map When the traffic info map is activated, the pic- ture on the Control Display is switched to a gray- scale. This permits an optimized depiction of traffic information. The day/night mode is disre- garded in this setting. The symbols for the spe- cial destinations are no longer displayed.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Open "Options".

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Route guidance NAVIGATION

135

4. "Settings"

5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"

Symbols in map view The symbols of traffic obstructions are displayed differently, depending on the scale of the map and location of the traffic obstruction in relation to the route.

Additional information in the map display Depending on the map scale, the length, direc- tion, and effects of a traffic obstruction are depicted by traffic symbols in the map or by bars along the planned route. The colors displayed depend on the information sent by the traffic information service.

> Red: traffic congestion

> Orange: stop-and-go traffic

> Yellow: heavy traffic

> Green: clear roads

> Gray: general traffic information such as road construction

The colors displayed depend on the information sent by the traffic information service.

Filtering of traffic bulletins To set which traffic bulletins the system should display:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Traffic Info categories"

5. Select the desired categories.

Traffic bulletins of the selected categories are displayed.

> Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route are always displayed.

> For personal safety, traffic information that indicates a potential hazard can not be hid- den.

Route guidance with traffic information

General information In semi-dynamic route guidance systems, detour suggestions by the navigation system can be added manually. In dynamic route guid- ance systems, they are automatically included in the route guidance.

Semi-dynamic route guidance With traffic information reception switched on, semi-dynamic route guidance is active.

The system takes into account the existing traffic information during route guidance. A message is displayed as a function of the route, the traffic information, and the possible alternate routes. When there are obstructions to traffic, an alter- nate route is provided. The difference in dis- tance and time between the original route and the alternate route are also displayed.

Taking an alternate route:

"Detour"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

NAVIGATION Route guidance

136

With particular hazards, e.g. objects on the road- way, a message is displayed without a possible alternate route.

It is also possible to take alternate routes can also be taken if the traffic reports are accessed via the list:

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

3. "Traffic Info"

4. "Detour information"

5. "Detour"

Dynamic route guidance The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions.

> The system will not point out traffic obstruc- tions on the original route.

> Traffic information will continue to be dis- played on the map.

> Depending on the type of road and the nature and length of the traffic obstruction, the route can also be calculated so that you travel through the traffic obstruction.

> Certain hazards are displayed regardless of the setting.

To activate dynamic route guidance:

1. "Navigation"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Dynamic guidance"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

What to do if NAVIGATION

137

What to do if

What to do if

> The current position cannot be displayed? The position is in an unrecognized region, in a poor reception area, or the system is in the process of determining the position. Recep- tion is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.

> The route guidance does not accept an address without the street name? A downtown area cannot be determined for the town or city that has been entered. Input any street in the selected town/city and start route guidance.

> The route guidance does not accept a desti- nation? The destination data is not contained in the navigation data. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

> The letters for a destination cannot be selected during destination entry? Stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

> The map view is displayed in grayscale? When the traffic info map is activated, the picture on the Control Display is switched to a grayscale. This permits an optimized depiction of traffic information.

> Voice instructions are no longer issued before intersections during route guidance? The area has not been fully recorded yet, or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calcu- late a new route suggestion.

> The navigation system does not react to entries? If the battery was disconnected, it takes about 10 minutes before the system is once again operational.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Rock Me.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

NAVIGATION

COMMUNICATIONS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Entertainment

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Entertainment On/off and tone

140

On/off and tone

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information The following audio sources have shared control elements and setting options:

> Radio

> CD player

> External devices, e.g. MP3 player

Controls The audio sources can be operated using:

> Buttons near the CD player

> Onboard computer

> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10

Buttons near the CD player

1 Drive for audio CDs

2 Selecting waveband

3 Changing the audio source

4 Sound output for entertainment on/off, vol- ume

> Press: switch on/off. When you switch on the unit, the radio station or track set most recently is played.

> Turn: adjust volume.

5 Station scan/track search

> Change radio station.

> Selecting a track

6 Ejecting CD

Switching on/off

Entertainment audio output

Press the knob.

This symbol at the upper edge of the Control Display indicates that the sound output is switched off.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

On/off and tone Entertainment

141

Adjusting volume

Turn the knob to the desired volume.

The volume can also be adjusted on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use; refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

Setting tone controls Various tone settings can be changed, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume con- trol. The tone settings are set for all audio sources at once.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use; refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

Treble, bass, balance, fader > "Treble": treble adjustment.

> "Bass": bass adjustment.

> "Balance": volume distribution right/left.

> "Fader": volume distribution front/back.

Adjustments 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. Select the desired tone setting.

4. To adjust: turn the MINI joystick.

5. To store: press the MINI joystick.

Volume levels > "Speed volume": volume is adapted

depending on the speed

> "PDC": volume of the PDC acoustic signal relative to the entertainment sound output

> "Gong": volume of the acoustic signal, e.g. for the acoustic Safety Belt Reminder rela- tive to the entertainment sound output

Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth

> "Microphone": volume of the microphone during a phone conversation.

> "Loudspeak.": volume of the speaker during a phone conversation.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Entertainment On/off and tone

142

Adjustments 1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Volume settings"

4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. To adjust: turn the MINI joystick.

6. To store: press the MINI joystick.

Resetting tone settings All tone settings can be reset to the default value.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

2. "Tone"

3. "Reset"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Radio Entertainment

143

Radio

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information Your radio is designed for reception of the fol- lowing stations:

> FM and AM

> HD Radio

> Satellite radio

AM/FM station

Selecting a station

Press the knob if the sound output is switched off.

1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select the desired station.

The selected station is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing stations Turn and press the MINI joystick

or

Press the button for the corresponding direction

or

Press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.

Selecting a station manually Station selection via the frequency.

1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. "Manual"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Entertainment Radio

144

4. Select the frequency: turn the MINI joystick.

To store the station: press the MINI joystick.

Storing stations 1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Press the MINI joystick.

5. Select the desired memory location.

Press and hold the MINI joystick to save a radio station that appears in the list of stations, but is not being listened to.

The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

RDS Radio Data System In the FM frequency range, additional informa- tion is transmitted via RDS. If the reception con- ditions are good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. If the reception is weak or disrupted, it can take some time before the station names are displayed.

Switching the RDS on/off 1. "Radio"

2. "FM"

3. Open "Options".

4. "RDS"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

HD Radio reception Many radio stations transmit analog and digital signals. If a digital radio network is available, these stations can be received digitally and thus with improved sound quality.

License conditions

HD Radio technology is manufactured under U.S. and Foreign Patents licensed from iBiquity Digital Corp. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq- uity Digital Corp.

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception 1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Open "Options".

4. "HD Radio Reception"

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

This symbol is displayed when a station is being received digitally.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Radio Entertainment

145

When setting a station with a digital signal, it may be a few seconds until the station is repro- duced in digital quality.

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, playback switches between analog and digital reception. In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Displaying additional information Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the art- ist.

1. Select the desired station.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Station info"

Selecting a substation The symbol indicates that a main station also broadcasts additional substations. The station name of the main station ends in HD1. The sta- tion names of the substations end in HD2, HD3, etc.

1. Select the desired station.

2. Press the MINI joystick.

3. Select the substation.

When reception is poor, the substation is muted for several seconds.

Stored stations It is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Selecting a station 1. "Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Select the desired station.

Storing a station The station currently selected is stored.

1. "Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. "Store station"

4. Select the desired memory location.

The list of stored stations is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Deleting a station 1. "Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. Select the desired station.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete entry"

Satellite radio

General information The channels are offered in fixed packages. Packages must be activated by telephone.

Navigation bar

Symbol Function

Changing list view

Selecting category

Entering channel directly

Time shift

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Entertainment Radio

146

Managing subscription Clear reception is required for activating and deactivating channels. Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.

Activating channels The category 'Unsubscribed Channels' includes all channels that are not activated.

1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Category"

4. Select the category 'Unsubscribed Chan- nels'.

5. Select desired channel. The telephone number and electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

6. Dial the telephone number to have the channels activated.

This telephone number can also be used to deactivate the channels.

Deactivating channels 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Manage subscription"

The telephone number and electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

5. Call Sirius to deactivate the channels.

Selecting channels You can only listen to activated channels.

The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Using the onboard computer 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate- gory.

Accessing favorites, selecting the My Favorites category

Managing favorites

Traffic Jump

Symbol Function

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Radio Entertainment

147

4. Select desired channel.

Using the buttons near the CD player Press the button for the corresponding direction. The next channel is selected.

Using direct channel entry 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Set channel"

4. Turn the MINI joystick until you reach the desired channel and then press the MINI joy- stick.

Storing channel 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select "All channels" or a desired category.

4. Select desired channel.

5. Press the MINI joystick again.

6. Press the MINI joystick again to confirm the highlighted channel.

7. Select the desired memory location.

The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing list view The list view changes each time the first symbol on the navigation bar is pressed.

Information about the channel is displayed.

Selecting category 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Category"

4. Select the desired category.

Time shift Approximately one hour of the channel cur- rently being listened to is temporarily stored in a cache memory. Prerequisite: the signal must be available.

The stored audio track can be played back at a different time from the live broadcast. If the cache memory is full, then the older tracks are recorded over. The cache memory is deleted if a new channel is selected.

Accessing Time shift 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

Symbol Function

Channel name

Artist

Track

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Entertainment Radio

148

3. "Replay - Time shift"

> The red arrow indicates the current playback position.

> The time difference from the live broadcast is displayed next to the cache memory bar.

> For live transmissions: "live".

Time shift menu

Automatic time shift When the function is activated, audio playback is stopped automatically in the event of:

> Incoming and outgoing telephone calls.

> Activation of the voice activation system.

> Muting.

The audio playback then continues with a time delay.

Activating 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Replay - Time shift"

4. "Automatic time shift"

Deactivating "Automatic time shift"

Storing favorites Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites list. Possible favorites include artist, track, game, league, and team.

Storing artist, track, or game Only current broadcasts can be stored as favor- ites. The channel information must be available.

1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate- gory.

4. Select desired channel.

5. Press the MINI joystick again.

6. Select artist, track, or game.

Storing league or team Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites from a selection list.

1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Manage favorites"

4. "Add sports information"

Symbol Function

Go to live broadcast

Playback/pause

Next track

Previous track

Fast forward

Reverse

Automatic time shift deacti- vated/activated

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Radio Entertainment

149

5. Select the desired league.

6. Select "Add all teams" or a desired team.

Accessing favorites If an activated favorite is being played, the mes- sage "Favorite alert!" appears for approx. 20 seconds.

Select "Favorites" while the alert message is being displayed.

The displayed favorite will be played.

If it receives no notification, the system switches into the 'My Favorites' category. All of the favor- ites currently being broadcast can be selected from a list.

Managing favorites

Activating/deactivating favorites Favorites can be activated or deactivated glo- bally and individually.

1. "Satellite radio"

2. "Manage favorites"

3. Select "Activate alert" or desired favorites.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Deleting favorites 1. "Satellite radio"

2. "Manage favorites"

3. Highlight the favorites you wish to delete.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Delete entry"

Traffic Jump Traffic and weather information for a selected region are broadcast at intervals of a few min- utes.

Selecting region 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Set jump"

5. Select the desired region.

The region is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Activating/deactivating Jump 1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Jump to:"

As soon as information about the selected region becomes available, it is broadcast.

A new panel appears in the display.

Cancel Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump.

Automatic update About twice a year, Sirius carries out an update of the names and positions of the channels. The update occurs automatically and can take sev- eral minutes.

Symbol Meaning

Information will be broadcast soon.

Information is currently being broadcast.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Entertainment Radio

150

Notes > Under some circumstances, reception may

not be possible, e.g. under certain environ- mental or topographical conditions. The sat- ellite radio has no influence on this.

> The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages or near trees, moun- tains, or other powerful sources of radio interference.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

CD player Entertainment

151

CD player

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information

Inserting CD Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side up. Die CD is automatically pulled in. Playback starts automatically if the sound out- put is on. For CDs with compressed audio files, it can take several minutes to the data, depending on the folder structure.

Playable formats CD player

> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA

> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC

Ejecting CD Press the button on the CD player. The CD will be slid a short distance out from the drive.

Audio playback

Selecting the track using the button Press the button for the corresponding direction repeatedly until you reach the desired track.

Selecting the track using the onboard computer

Audio CDs 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD"

3. Select the desired track. Press the MINI joystick to start playback.

CDs with compressed audio files Depending on the data, it is possible that not all indications on the CD will be correctly displayed.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD"

3. Select the directory, if necessary. To change to a higher level directory: move the MINI joystick to the left.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Entertainment CD player

152

4. Select a track and press the MINI joystick.

Displaying information about the track If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically:

> Artist

> Album title

> Number of tracks on the CD

> Track file name

Random play sequence The tracks on the current CD are played once each in random order.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD"

3. Select the desired CD.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Random"

Switch off random play sequence: press the MINI joystick.

Fast forward/reverse Press and hold the button for the corre- sponding direction.

Automatic replay Selected tracks, folders, or CDs are automatically repeated.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

External devices Entertainment

153

External devices

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Overview Different external devices can be connected to the vehicle. Sound is output over the vehicle speakers. Depending upon how the external device is connected to the vehicle, the device may be operated using the MINI joystick.

AUX-In connection

Overview > It is possible to connect audio devices, e.g.

MP3 players. Sound is output over the vehi- cle speakers.

> Recommended settings: mid-level tone and volume settings on the audio device. Tone may depend on the quality of the audio files.

Connecting

1 USB interface

2 Connection for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8''/3.5 mm

For audio playback over the vehicle speakers, connect the headphones or line-out connection of the device to the AUX-In connection 2.

Make sure that the plug is inserted into the AUX- IN port all the way in until it reaches the stop.

Starting audio playback The audio device must be switched on.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices" if applicable

3. "AUX front"

Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Symbol Meaning

USB interface

Music interface for smartphones

Bluetooth audio

AUX-In connection

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Entertainment External devices

154

Volume The volume of the sound output depends on the audio device. If this volume greatly deviates from the other audio sources, then the volume should be equalized.

Adjusting volume 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices" if applicable

3. "AUX front"

4. "Volume"

5. Turn MINI joystick until the desired volume is set and then press the MINI joystick.

USB audio interface/ Music interface for smartphones

Overview It is possible to connect external audio devices. They are operated using the onboard computer. Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.

Options for connecting external devices > Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

devices, USB devices such as MP3 players, USB memory sticks, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface.

> Connection via snap-in adapter if the vehicle is equipped with a music interface for smart- phones: Apple iPhone or mobile phones.

Because of the large number of audio devices available on the market, an operation via the vehicle cannot be guaranteed for every audio device/mobile phone. Ask your MINI dealer for suitable audio devices/ mobile phones.

File systems Popular file systems for USB devices are sup- ported. The manufacturer of your MINI recom- mends the FAT 32 format.

Audio files Playback of standard audio files is possible, depending on the vehicle equipment:

> MP3

> WMA

> WAV (PCM)

> AAC, M4A

> Without voice activation system: Playback lists: M3U

> With voice activation system: Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS

Video files Playback of standard video files with a compati- ble Apple device is possible:

> MPEG4

> H.264

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

External devices Entertainment

155

Connecting via the USB audio interface

1 USB interface

2 AV-In connection for audio/video playback: TRS connector 1/8''/3.5 mm

Apple device A special adapter cable is available for connect- ing the Apple device. The adapter cable is required for a proper connection. Further information:

> At: www.mini.com/connectivity

> At your MINI dealer.

For audio playback over the vehicle speakers, connect the Apple device using the special adapter cable with AV-In connection 2 and USB interface 1 or using a flexible adapter cable with a USB interface 1.

The USB audio interface supports the menu structure of the Apple device.

USB device To protect the USB interface and USB device from mechanical damage, connect them with a flexible adapter cable.

Connect the USB device to the USB interface 1.

After initial connection Track information, e.g. artist or music style and the playlists of the USB device are imported into the vehicle. This process can take some time. The time required is dependent on the USB device and on the number of tracks.

During transmission, the tracks can be accessed via the file directory.

Number of tracks The data from up to four USB devices or for approx. 26,000 tracks can be stored in the vehi- cle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than 26,000 tracks are stored, then the data of exist- ing tracks may be deleted.

Copy protection Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man- agement (DRM) cannot be played.

Audio playback

Starting audio playback 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol and press the MINI joystick.

Playback begins with the first track.

Track search Selection is possible via:

> Playback lists

> Information: music style, artist; if applicable, composer, album, track.

> Additionally for USB devices: file directory; if applicable, composer.

Track titles are displayed if they have been stored in the Latin alphabet.

Starting the track search 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Entertainment External devices

156

3. Select the or symbol.

4. Select desired category, e.g. "Genre", "Art- ist".

All entries are displayed in a list.

> Open "A-Z search" and enter the desired input. When a letter is entered, the results are filtered using this letter as the first letter. If multiple letters are entered, all results that contain that sequence are displayed.

> Select the desired entry from the list.

5. Select additional categories if desired.

Not all categories need to be selected. For example, if all of the tracks by a certain artist are to be displayed, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then dis- played.

6. "Play"

Restarting a track search "New search"

Playback lists To open playback lists.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol.

4. "Playlists"

Current playback List of tracks currently being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol.

4. "Current playback"

Random play sequence The current list of tracks is played in random sequence.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse Buttons on the steering wheel or CD player:

Press and hold the button for the corre- sponding direction.

Video playback

Overview Video playback is only possible with an iPod/ iPhone. To connect, use a video adapter cable or possibly a snap- in adapter.

Playback The video image on the is displayed control dis- play when the vehicle is standing still, in some countries only when the hand brake is engaged or if the transmission selector lever is in the P position.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

External devices Entertainment

157

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the or symbol and press the MINI joystick.

4. "Video"

5. Select the desired file.

Select category in file directory, if applicable.

6. Press the MINI joystick.

The playback of the selected video file is started.

Notes Do not subject the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g.

extremely high temperatures, refer to the oper- ating instructions for the audio device. Other- wise the audio device may be damaged, impair- ing driving safety while driving.<

Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s, proper playback cannot always be ensured.

Audio and video playback from using a snap-in adapter may only be possible if a there is no cable connected to the AV-In connector.

Information on connection > The connected audio device is supplied with

a max. power of 500 mA if supported by the device. Therefore, do not connect the device to the power socket in the vehicle.

> Do not use force when plugging the connec- tor into the USB interface.

> Do not connect any devices, e.g. fans or lamps, to the USB audio interface.

> Do not connect USB hard drives.

> Do not use the USB audio interface to recharge external devices.

Bluetooth audio

Overview > It is possible to use Bluetooth to play music

files from external devices, e.g. audio devices or mobile phones.

> Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

> Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.

> The volume of the sound output depends on the device. If necessary, change the volume setting on the device.

> Up to four external devices can be paired with the vehicle.

Requirements > Suitable device. Information is available at

www.mini.com/connectivity.

> Device operational.

> Ignition switched on.

> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to page 175, and in the device.

> Bluetooth presets in the device are required, e.g. connection not confirmed or visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the device.

> A number with at least 4 and at most 16 digits has been established as the Blue-

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Entertainment External devices

158

tooth passkey. Only required once for pair- ing.

Pairing and connecting Only pair the device when the vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention may lead

to endangerment of passengers or other road users.<

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. "Bluetooth audio" if applicable

4. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis- played.

5. To perform other operations on the device, refer to the operating instructions for the device: e.g. search for and connect Blue- tooth device or a new device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the device's display.

6. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the device's display.

The onboard computer or the device will prompt you to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.

7. Enter the passkey and confirm.

or

Compare the control number on the vehicle display with the control number on the mobile phone display. Confirm the control number in the mobile phone and in the vehi- cle.

"OK".

8. Select desired functions with which the device is to be connected, e.g. "Audio".

9. "OK"

If the pairing was successful, the device is dis- played as connected.

symbol displayed in white: device is active as an audio source.

If the pairing was not successful: what to do if, refer to page 160.

Connecting a particular device A device that has already been paired can be connected as an active audio source.

Connection is not possible if a data exchange is currently taking place via a mobile phone that is connected via Bluetooth.

Prerequisite If necessary, activate the audio connection of the desired device from the list of paired devices.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. "Bluetooth audio" if applicable

4. Select the desired device from the list of paired devices.

5. Open "Options".

6. "Configure phone"

7. Activate "Audio".

8. "OK"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

External devices Entertainment

159

Connecting a device 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. "Bluetooth audio" if applicable

4. Select the desired device from the list of paired devices.

symbol displayed in white: device is active as an audio source.

Playback

General information > The display of track information depends on

the device.

> Operation via the device or the onboard computer are both possible.

> Playback is interrupted if a data exchange takes place via a mobile phone that is con- nected via Bluetooth.

Starting playback 1. Connect device.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

3. "External devices"

4. Select the symbol.

5. Select the desired track from the list.

Playback menu Depending on the device, all functions may not be available.

Track search Depending on the device, it is possible to search by track.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Search device content"

5. "A-Z search"

6. Select desired entry or directory.

Symbol Function

Next track

Fast forward: press and hold the symbol.

Previous track

Reverse: press and hold the sym- bol.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Entertainment External devices

160

Player program Depending on the device, there may be various programs for playing music files.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Select player"

6. Select the desired program.

Disconnecting an audio connection 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. Select the desired device from the list of con- nected devices.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Configure phone"

6. Deactivate "Audio".

7. "OK"

With a mobile phone, only the audio connection is disconnected. All other connections remain active.

Unpairing device 1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "Bluetooth (audio)"

3. "Bluetooth audio" if applicable

4. Highlight the device to be unpaired.

5. Open "Options".

6. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if Information about suitable devices is available at www.mini.com/connectivity.

Suitable mobile phones, refer to page 174.

Device not supported by vehicle.

> If necessary, carry out a software update, refer to page 161.

Device could not be paired or connected.

> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the device and vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the device and via the onboard com- puter.

> A multi-digit passkey may be required.

> Is the passkey input taking longer than 30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.

> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the device or to the vehicle? If necessary, delete the connections with other devices.

> Is the mobile phone in power economy mode or does it only have a small amount of battery charge remaining? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a charging cable.

> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only be possible to connect one device to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and only pair and connect one device.

> Is the device no longer responding? Switch the device off and back on again.

> Repeat the pairing procedure.

No music can be played.

> Start the program for playing music files on the device and if necessary, select a track via the device.

> Activate and deactivate the radio mute on the radio control panel.

Music files only play quietly.

> Adjust volume settings on the device.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

External devices Entertainment

161

Videos cannot be played or can only be played with a delayed audio output.

> Check the device compatibility. Information is available at www.mini.com/connectivity.

Playback is interrupted by the press of a button or other messages on the device.

> Switch off key tones and other acoustic sig- nal on the device.

Playback is interrupted by a phone call or traffic report and does not automatically continue.

> Activate and deactivate the radio mute on the radio control panel.

Playback is not possible when the mobile phone is connected via Bluetooth audio and at the same time via the music interface for smart- phones at the snap-in adapter.

> Disconnect one of the two connections, e.g. the audio connection, refer to page 160, and start playback again.

If you have gone through all items in the list and still cannot activate the desired function please contact the Hotline or your MINI dealer.

Software update The vehicle supports various external devices, depending on the software it is currently using. A software update can enable the vehicle to support, for example, new mobile phones or new external devices.

Software updates and associated, up-to-date instructions are available on the web page www.mini.com/connectivity.

Displaying current version The currently installed software is displayed.

1. "Settings"

2. "Software update"

3. "Show current version"

Updating software The software update can only be performed when stopped.

1. Save the file for the software update in the main directory of a USB data storage device.

2. Connect the USB data storage device to the USB port in the center console, refer to page 154. Updating using the USB port in the glove compartment is not possible.

3. "Settings"

4. "Software update"

5. "Update software"

6. "Start update"

7. "OK"

All of the listed software updates are installed.

Reinstalling previous version The software version before the last software update can be restored.

The restoring to the previous version can only be performed when stopped.

1. "Settings"

2. "Software update"

3. "Restore previous version"

4. Select "OK" twice.

All of the listed software updates are removed.

Note MINI Connected, Office functions, and con- nected devices may temporarily be unavailable during a software update or while restoring to the previous version. Wait a few minutes until the functions are available once more.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Connect Me.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

NAVIGATION

Entertainment

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

COMMUNICATIONS

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Hands-free device Bluetooth

164

Hands-free device Bluetooth

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Overview

The concept Mobile phones can be connected to the vehicle through Bluetooth.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG, Inc.

After being paired once, when the ignition is switched on, these devices are automatically detected as soon as they are present in the vehi- cle and can be controlled via the onboard com- puter, the buttons on the steering wheel, and by voice.

Up to four mobile phones can be paired.

It may be necessary for some functions to be activated by the mobile phone provider.

Only make entries when traffic conditions permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in

your hand while you are driving; use the hands- free system instead. If you do not observe this precaution, your being distracted can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.

Suitable mobile phones Precise information as to which mobile phones are supported by the hands-free device can be found at www.mini.com/connectivity.

With a certain software version, these suitable mobile phones support the vehicle functions described below.

With other mobile phones or software versions, malfunctions may occur.

A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle should not be operated via the mobile phone keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.

Displaying vehicle identification number and software part number To check which mobile phones are supported by the hands-free device, the vehicle identification number and the software part number will be required. The software version of the mobile phone may also be required.

1. "Telephone"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Bluetooth info"

4. "Display system information"

Notes Do not expose your mobile phone to extreme ambient conditions, for example, very high tem- peratures; otherwise, functions on your mobile phone may not work. Follow the operating instructions for your mobile phone.

Pairing/unpairing mobile phone

Requirements > Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 164.

> Mobile phone operational.

> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to page 165, and in the mobile phone.

> Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are required, e.g. connection not confirmed or visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Hands-free device Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS

165

> A number with at least 4 and at most 16 digits has been established as the Blue- tooth passkey. Only required once for pair- ing.

> Compare the control number on the Control Display with the control number on the mobile phone display. Confirm the control number in the mobile phone and in the vehi- cle.

> Radio readiness switched on.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

1. "Telephone"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Bluetooth"

Pairing and connecting Only pair the mobile phone when the vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention

may lead to endangerment of passengers or other road users.<

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis- played.

4. To perform other operations on the mobile phone, refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone: e.g. search for and connect Bluetooth device or a new device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.

5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

6. The onboard computer or the mobile phone will prompt you to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.

Enter the passkey and confirm.

or

Compare the control number on the vehicle display with the control number on the mobile phone display. Confirm the control number in the mobile phone and in the vehi- cle.

"OK"

7. Select the functions that are to be used for the mobile phone.

8. "OK"

9. Move the MINI joystick to the left.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Hands-free device Bluetooth

166

If pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.

If the pairing was not successful: what to do if, refer to page 166.

Following the initial pairing > The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or radio readi- ness is switched on.

> After identification, phone book entries are imported from the mobile phone and/or SIM card of the telephone, depending on the telephone.

> Four mobile phones can be paired.

> Specific settings may be necessary in some mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a secure connection, refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

Connecting a particular mobile phone 1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

All paired mobile phones are listed.

3. Select the mobile phone to be connected.

Unpairing mobile phone 1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

All paired mobile phones are listed.

3. Highlight the mobile phone to be unpaired.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if For information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 164.

The mobile phone could not be paired or con- nected.

> Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and in the mobile phone.

> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via the onboard computer.

> A multi-digit passkey may be required.

> Is the passkey input taking longer than 30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.

> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con- nections with other devices on the mobile phone.

> Is the mobile phone in power economy mode or does it only have a small amount of battery charge remaining? Charge the mobile phone using a charging cable.

> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only be possible to connect one device to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and only pair and connect one device.

> Is the mobile phone no longer responding? Switch the mobile phone off and back on again. Repeat the pairing procedure.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Hands-free device Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS

167

Is the mobile phone no longer responding?

> Switch the mobile phone off and back on again. Repeat the pairing procedure.

> Is the ambient temperature too high or too low? Do not subject your mobile phone to extreme ambient temperatures.

Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of them are displayed, or they are displayed incompletely.

> The transfer of phone book entries has not yet completed.

> It is possible that only the phone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transferred.

> It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

> The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

> Is the amount of data for the contact too large, e.g., because of stored information such as addresses? Reduce the number of data entries.

The telephone connection quality is low.

> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi- ble to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal.

> Place mobile phone in the area of the center console.

If you have gone through all items in the list and still cannot activate the desired function please contact the Hotline or your MINI dealer.

Operation

Adjusting volume

Turn the knob until the desired volume is reached.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Incoming call

Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, then the name and number of the contact are dis- played; otherwise, only the number is displayed.

If a contact is assigned more than one phone number, then only the name of the caller is transmitted.

Accepting a call Press the button on the steering wheel

or

"Accept"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Hands-free device Bluetooth

168

Rejecting a call "Reject"

The caller is redirected to the mailbox if it has been activated.

Ending a call Press the button on the steering wheel

or

1. "Telephone"

2. "End call"

Entering phone numbers

Dialing a number 1. "Telephone"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the digits individually.

4. Select the symbol.

It is also possible to enter phone numbers by voice, page 183.

Calls with multiple parties

General information It is possible to switch between two calls and to connect two calls to form a conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and by the service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function may have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone may need to be adjusted for this.

When a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call-waiting signal sounds.

"Accept"

The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call Establish another call during an active call.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Active calls"

3. "Hold"

The existing call is put on hold.

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

"Return" The conversion that was on hold is continued.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Hands-free device Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS

169

Switching between two calls, toggling Active call: highlighted.

The call on hold is identified with: "on hold...".

Select the symbol to switch to the call on hold.

Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele- phone conference call.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Conference call"

Both calls are always ended when a conference call is terminated. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued.

Keypad dialing Use keypad dialing to gain access to network services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely access an answering machine. This requires the DTMF code.

1. "Telephone"

2. Select contact from a list or "Dial number"

3. "Keypad dialing"

4. Enter the DTMF code via the onboard com- puter.

For a conference call in progress, DTMF dialing is not possible.

Phone book

Displays The phone book accesses the contacts of the telephone and shows all contacts for which a phone number is entered. The entries can be selected to make a call.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Phone book"

A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts, refer to page 171.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Hands-free device Bluetooth

170

Calling a contact 1. Select the desired contact.

Select the symbol. Contact with one phone number. The connection is estab- lished.

2. Select the symbol. Contact with more than one phone number. Select phone number, the connection is established.

Call not possible, the mobile phone has no reception or network.

Editing a contact Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a contact is changed, the changes are not stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Edit entry"

The contact can be edited.

Redialing

General information The list of dialed numbers in the telephone are transferred to the vehicle, depending on the mobile phone. The last 20 phone numbers dialed are displayed. The sorting of the phone numbers depends on the mobile phone.

Selecting the number using the onboard computer 1. "Telephone"

2. "Redial"

3. Select the desired entry and phone number, if necessary.

The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries Deleting entries depends upon the mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi- ness", "Mobile" or "Other".

5. Complete the entries if necessary.

6. "Store contact" if necessary

Received calls

Displaying calls The list of received calls in the telephone is transferred into the vehicle, depending on the mobile phone. The last 20 calls received are dis- played. The sorting and displaying of phone numbers depends on the mobile phone.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Received calls"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Hands-free device Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS

171

Calling a number from the list Select an entry. The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries Deleting entries depends upon the mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi- ness", "Mobile" or "Other".

5. Complete the entries if necessary.

6. "Store contact" if necessary

Hands-free system

General information Calls being conducted using the hands-free sys- tem can be continued using the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands- free system Calls that have been initiated from outside the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued using the hands-free system if the ignition is switched on.

Depending on the mobile phone, the call is automatically switched to hands-free mode.

If the switch does not occur automatically, then follow the instructions that appear on the dis- play of the mobile phone, also refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

From hands-free system to mobile phone Calls being conducted using the hands-free sys- tem can also be continued using the mobile phone if so desired, depending on the mobile phone.

At this point, follow the instructions that appear on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

Contacts

General information Contacts can be created and edited. The addresses can be used as destinations for navi- gation.

New contact 1. "Contacts"

2. "New contact"

3. If input boxes are already filled with previous entries: "Delete input fields"

4. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Hands-free device Bluetooth

172

5. Input text, refer to page 20.

When equipped with a navigation system: enter address. It is only possible to enter addresses that are contained in the naviga- tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures that route guidance is possible for all addresses.

6. "Store" if necessary

7. "Store contact in vehicle"

Defining a home address It is possible to store a home address. It is listed at the beginning of the contacts.

1. "Home"

2. Create a contact.

3. "Store contact in vehicle"

My contacts

General information Listing all contacts from the vehicle.

Displaying contacts 1. "Contacts"

2. "My contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered.

A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact.

2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entry.

4. Move the MINI joystick to the left.

5. "Yes"

If a contact that comes from the mobile phone is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehi- cle, and only this copy is displayed. Under cer- tain conditions, an identical contact entry is gen- erated.

Selecting a contact as a destination 1. Select the desired contact.

2. Select address.

3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina- tion"

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a desti- nation.

Mobile phone

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Hands-free device Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS

173

Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used in route guidance must correspond to the navigation data stored in the vehicle. The address can be checked to ensure this.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Check as destination"

4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.

Selecting name sorting Names can be displayed in different orders.

1. "My contacts"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first, last name"

Depending on how the contacts were stored in the mobile phone, the sorting of names can dif- fer from the sorting selected.

Deleting contacts 1. "My contacts"

2. Highlight the contact.

3. Open "Options".

4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth

174

Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Overview

The concept Mobile phones or other external devices, e.g. audio players, can be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG, Inc.

After being paired once, when the ignition is switched on, these devices are automatically detected as soon as they are present in the vehi- cle and can be controlled via the onboard com- puter, the buttons on the steering wheel, and by voice.

Depending on whether they are functioning as a telephone and/or as an audio source, external devices can be used via the vehicle. The tele- phone functions will be described below. Oper- ation of audio functions, refer to page 157.

It may be necessary for some functions to be activated by the mobile phone provider.

Only make entries when traffic conditions permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in

your hand while you are driving; use the hands- free system instead. If you do not observe this precaution, your being distracted can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.<

Snap-in adapter The snap-in adapter, refer to page 185, makes it possible to:

> Accommodate the mobile phone.

> Recharge its battery.

> Connect it to an external antenna of the vehicle.

This assures a better network connection and constant sound quality.

A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle should not be operated via the mobile phone keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.

Suitable mobile phones For precise information as to which mobile phones and external devices with Bluetooth interfaces are supported by the mobile phone preparation package, go to www.mini.com/ connectivity.

With a certain software version, these suitable mobile phones support the vehicle functions described below.

With other mobile phones or software versions, malfunctions may occur.

It is possible to perform a software update, refer to page 161.

Displaying vehicle identification number and software part number Checking which mobile phones are supported by the mobile phone preparation requires the vehicle identification number and software part number. The software version of the mobile phone may also be required.

1. "Telephone"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Bluetooth info"

4. "Display system information"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS

175

Notes Do not expose your mobile phone to extreme ambient conditions, for example, very high tem- peratures; otherwise, functions on your mobile phone may not work. Follow the operating instructions for your mobile phone.

Pairing/unpairing mobile phone

Overview > Using a mobile phone as a telephone.

> Using the mobile phone as an auxiliary phone.

> Using a mobile phone as an audio source.

> Using an audio device as an audio source, refer to page 157.

Functions supported by the mobile phone and audio device are displayed as symbols during the pairing.

White symbol: function active.

Gray symbol: function inactive.

Up to four external devices can be paired. Two devices can be connected to the vehicle at a time and used for different functions. The phone can be used to perform all of the following phone functions.

Requirements > Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 174.

> Mobile phone operational.

> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to page 175, and in the mobile phone.

> Bluetooth presets in the mobile phone are required, e.g. connection not confirmed or visible, refer to Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

> If necessary, deactivate the audio connec- tion, refer to page 176.

> A number with at least 4 and at most 16 digits has been established as the Blue- tooth passkey. Only required once for pair- ing.

> Compare the control number on the Control Display with the control number on the mobile phone display. Confirm the control number in the mobile phone and in the vehi- cle.

> Ignition switched on.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

1. "Telephone"

2. Open "Options".

3. "Bluetooth"

Activating/deactivating additional functions To use these functions in the vehicle, activate them before pairing. For information on suitable mobile phones that support this function, refer to page 174.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. Open "Options".

Symbol Function

Telephone

Auxiliary phone

Audio source

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth

176

4. "Configure Bluetooth"

5. Select desired additional function.

Bluetooth audio Use a mobile phone as a telephone and as an audio device in the vehicle.

"Bluetooth audio"

To use a mobile phone exclusively as a tele- phone in the vehicle, deactivate the function and reconnect the mobile phone.

Office Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes- sages, and e-mails are imported from the mobile phone into the vehicle.

"Office"

Auxiliary phone Another mobile phone can be used as an auxil- iary phone.

"Additional telephone"

Incoming calls to the auxiliary phone can be accepted, refer to page 179. Missed calls to the auxiliary phone are shown in the Control Dis- play.

Pairing and connecting Only pair the mobile phone when the vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention

may lead to endangerment of passengers or other road users.<

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. "Add new phone"

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis- played.

4. To perform other operations on the mobile phone, refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone: e.g. search for and connect Bluetooth device or a new device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.

5. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

6. The onboard computer or the mobile phone will prompt you to enter the same Bluetooth passkey.

Enter the passkey and confirm.

or

Compare the control number on the vehicle display with the control number on the mobile phone display. Confirm the control number in the mobile phone and in the vehi- cle.

"OK"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS

177

7. Select the functions that are to be used for the mobile phone.

8. "OK"

9. Move the MINI joystick to the left.

If pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.

If the pairing was not successful: what to do if, refer to page 178.

Following the initial pairing > The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within a short period of time when the engine is running or radio readi- ness is switched on.

> After identification, phone book entries are imported from the mobile phone and/or SIM card of the telephone, depending on the telephone.

> Specific settings may be necessary in some mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a secure connection, refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

Connecting a particular mobile phone 1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

All paired mobile phones are listed.

3. Select the mobile phone to be connected.

The assigned functions before the unpairing of the mobile phone are assigned to the mobile phone when it is reconnected. If a mobile phone is already connected, then these functions are deactivated if necessary.

Device options Device options in devices that are paired and connected can be activated or deactivated.

Configuring device 1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. Highlight the device to be configured.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Configure phone"

6. Activate/deactivate functions. At least one function must be selected.

> "Telephone"

> "Additional telephone"

> "Audio"

7. "OK"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth

178

If a device is assigned a function, this may deac- tivate the function in an already connected device and cause the other device to be unpaired.

Exchanging the telephone and auxiliary phone If the telephone and auxiliary phone are con- nected to the vehicle, the function can be swapped between the two devices.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

3. "Swap phone/addit. phone"

Using the mobile phone as an audio source Using the audio-capable mobile phone as an audio source. Activate Bluetooth audio, refer to page 176.

Activate and connect the mobile phone in vehi- cle, refer to page 176.

The mobile phone is used as an audio source if no other device is connected as an audio source.

If a device is already connected as an audio source:

1. Activate and connect the mobile phone in vehicle, refer to page 176.

2. "Use for audio"

The mobile phone is connected as an audio source. The previous audio source is no longer connected to the vehicle.

Unpairing device 1. "Telephone"

2. "Bluetooth (phone)"

All paired devices are listed.

3. Highlight the device to be unpaired.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Remove phone from list"

What to do if For information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 174.

The mobile phone could not be paired or con- nected.

> Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the vehicle and in the mobile phone.

> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? Enter the same passkey on the mobile phone and via the onboard computer.

> A multi-digit passkey may be required.

> Is the passkey input taking longer than 30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.

> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con- nections with other devices on the mobile phone.

> Is the audio connection activated? Deacti- vate the audio connection.

> Is the mobile phone in power economy mode or does it only have a small amount of battery charge remaining? Charge the mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a charging cable.

> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only be possible to connect one device to the vehicle. Unpair the connected device from the vehicle and only pair and connect one device.

> Telephone functions not possible.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS

179

> Is the mobile phone paired as an auxiliary phone and is the auxiliary phone function deactivated? Activate the function.

> Outgoing call not possible? Connect the mobile phone as a telephone.

Is the mobile phone no longer responding?

> Switch the mobile phone off and back on again. Repeat the pairing procedure.

> Is the ambient temperature too high or too low? Do not subject your mobile phone to extreme ambient temperatures.

Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of them are displayed, or they are displayed incompletely.

> The transfer of phone book entries has not yet completed.

> It is possible that only the phone book entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transferred.

> It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

> The number of phone book entries to be stored is too high.

> The data volume of the phone book entry is too great, e.g. due to additionally stored information such as notes? Reduce the data volume.

> Is the mobile phone connected as an audio source or auxiliary phone? The mobile phone must be connected as a telephone.

The telephone connection quality is low.

> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi- ble to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal.

> Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in adapter or place it in the vicinity of the cen- ter console.

> Adjust the volume of the microphone and speaker separately.

If you have gone through all items in the list and still cannot activate the desired function please contact the Hotline or your MINI dealer.

Operation

Adjusting volume

Turn the knob until the desired volume is reached.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of the microphone on the mobile phone and the volume of the person on the phone with you. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be nec- essary to adjust the volumes.

Adjustments are only possible during a call and must be carried out separately for each phone. When the telephone is unpaired, this deletes the settings.

1. "Settings"

2. "Tone"

3. "Volume settings"

4. To select the desired setting: "Microphone" or "Loudspeak."

5. To adjust: turn the MINI joystick.

6. To store: press the MINI joystick.

Incoming call

Receiving calls If the number of the caller is stored in the phone book and is transmitted by the network, then the name and number of the contact are dis- played; otherwise, only the number is displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth

180

If a contact is assigned more than one phone number, then only the name of the caller is transmitted.

With calls to the auxiliary phone, only the num- ber is displayed if it is transmitted by the net- work.

An incoming call on a phone will be rejected automatically when a call is active on the other phone.

Accepting a call Press the button on the steering wheel

or

"Accept"

Rejecting a call "Reject"

The caller is redirected to the mailbox if it has been activated.

Ending a call Press the button on the steering wheel

or

1. "Telephone"

2. "End call"

Entering phone numbers

Dialing a number 1. "Telephone"

2. "Dial number"

3. Select the digits individually.

4. Select the symbol.

It is also possible to enter phone numbers by voice.

Calls with multiple parties

General information It is possible to switch between two calls and to connect two calls to form a conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and by the service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party This function may have to be activated by the service provider and the mobile phone may need to be adjusted for this.

When a second call comes in during an ongoing call, a call-waiting signal sounds.

"Accept"

The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call Establish another call during an active call.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Active calls"

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS

181

3. "Hold"

The existing call is put on hold.

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

Switching between two calls, toggling Active call: highlighted.

The call on hold is identified with: "on hold...".

Select the symbol to switch to the call on hold.

Establishing a conference call Two calls can be connected to a single tele- phone conference call.

1. Establish two calls.

2. "Conference call"

Both calls are always ended when a conference call is terminated. If one call is terminated by another party, the other call can be continued.

Muting the microphone The microphone can be muted in active calls.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Active calls"

3. "Microphone mute"

The muted microphone is automatically acti- vated:

> If a new call is made.

> When switching between callers on hold.

Keypad dialing Use keypad dialing to gain access to network services or to control devices, e.g. to remotely access an answering machine. This requires the DTMF code.

1. "Telephone"

2. Select contact from a list or "Dial number"

3. "Keypad dialing"

4. Enter the DTMF code via the onboard com- puter.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth

182

Phone book

Displays The phone book accesses the contacts of the telephone and shows all contacts for which a phone number is entered. The entries can be selected to make a call.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Phone book"

A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts, refer to page 188.

Calling a contact 1. Select the desired contact.

Select the symbol. Contact with one phone number. The connection is estab- lished.

2. Select the symbol. Contact with more than one phone number. Select phone number, the connection is established.

Call not possible, the mobile phone has no reception or network.

Editing a contact Changing entries in the "Contacts" menu. If a contact is changed, the changes are not stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Edit entry"

The contact can be edited.

Redialing

General information The list of dialed numbers in the telephone are transferred to the vehicle, depending on the mobile phone. The last 20 phone numbers dialed are displayed. The sorting of the phone numbers depends on the mobile phone.

Selecting the number using the onboard computer 1. "Telephone"

2. "Redial"

3. Select the desired entry and phone number, if necessary.

The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries Deleting entries depends upon the mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi- ness", "Mobile" or "Other".

5. Complete the entries if necessary.

6. "Store contact" if necessary

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS

183

Received calls

Displaying calls The list of received calls in the telephone is transferred into the vehicle, depending on the mobile phone. The last 20 calls received are dis- played. The sorting and displaying of phone numbers depends on the mobile phone.

1. "Telephone"

2. "Received calls"

Calling a number from the list Select an entry. The connection is established.

Deleting a single entry or all entries Deleting entries depends upon the mobile phone.

1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in the contacts 1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi- ness", "Mobile" or "Other".

5. Complete the entries if necessary.

6. "Store contact" if necessary

Hands-free system

General information Calls being conducted using the hands-free sys- tem can be continued using the mobile phone and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands- free system Calls that have been initiated from outside the Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued using the hands-free system if the ignition is switched on.

Depending on the mobile phone, the call is automatically switched to hands-free mode.

If the switch does not occur automatically, then follow the instructions that appear on the dis- play of the mobile phone, also refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

From hands-free system to mobile phone Calls being conducted using the hands-free sys- tem can also be continued using the mobile phone if so desired, depending on the mobile phone.

At this point, follow the instructions that appear on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone.

Operation by voice Equipped with voice activation system: opera- tion, refer to page 21. For the list with the short commands, refer to page 252, does not apply for this type of voice operation.

Equipped without voice activation system: depending upon the equipment, the mobile phone can be voice-operated as described below.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth

184

The concept > The mobile phone can be operated without

removing your hand from the steering wheel.

> In many cases, the entry process is sup- ported by means of announcements or questions.

> {...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice operation system.

> {{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the voice operation system.

Voice commands

Activating voice activation system 1. Briefly press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say the command.

Finishing voice input Press the button on the steering wheel briefly or

Possible commands

Having possible commands read aloud Press the button on the steering wheel.

Possible commands are read aloud.

Each digit can be spoken individually or com- bined into a sequence to accelerate the entry process.

Using alternative commands There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:

Example: dialing phone numbers 1. Briefly press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. {Dial number}

3. The system replies: {{Please say the num- ber.}}

4. For example: {123 456 7890}

5. The system replies: {{123 456 7890. Con- tinue?}}

6. {Dial} System replies: {{Dialing number.}}

Calling

Dialing phone numbers

The connection to the desired subscriber is established.

Correcting phone number Digit sequences can be deleted after the system has repeated the digits.

The command can be repeated as often as nec- essary.

Deleting phone number

All digits entered up to this point are deleted.

Redialing

Voice phone book Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, it may be necessary to create your own voice phone book.

{Cancel}.

{Help}.

{Dial name} or {Name}.

1. {Dial number}.

2. Say the phone number.

3. {Dial}.

{Correct number}.

{Delete}.

{Redial}.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth COMMUNICATIONS

185

The entries must be entered by voice and are independent of the mobile phone's memory. Up to 50 entries can be set up.

Storing the entry

Deleting the entry

Deleting all entries

Reading and selecting the entries

Selecting an entry

Adjusting volume Turn knob during announcement.

> The volume remains the same, even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.

> The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Notes Do not use the voice operation system to initiate an emergency call. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a tele- phone connection.

Ambient conditions > Say the commands, numbers and letters

smoothly and with normal volume, empha- sis and speed.

> Always say the commands in the language of the system. The language for voice oper- ation system is preset and can not be changed via the Control Display.

> Keep doors, windows, glass sunroof/pan- oramic sunroof, or convertible top closed to avoid noise interference.

> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Snap-in adapter

The concept The snap-in adapter makes it possible to do the following:

> Accommodate the mobile phone.

> Recharge its battery.

> Connect to the outside antenna of the vehi- cle.

This assures a better network connection and constant sound quality.

General information Detailed information on snap-in adapters that compatibly support mobile phone functions can be found at your MINI dealer.

Do not expose your mobile phone to extreme ambient conditions, for example, very high tem- peratures; otherwise, functions on your mobile phone may not work. Follow the operating instructions for your mobile phone.

1. {Save name}.

2. Say the name aloud. Do not exceed a speaking duration of about 2 seconds.

3. Say the phone number after being prompted to do so by the system.

4. {Save}.

1. {Delete name}.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm prompt with {Yes}.

1. {Delete phonebook}. The dialog for deleting phone book is opened.

2. Confirm prompt with {Yes}.

3. Confirm repeated prompt with {Yes}.

1. {Read phonebook}. The dialog for reading phone book is opened.

2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is read aloud.

1. {Dial name}.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm prompt with {Yes}.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth

186

Installation location In the center armrest.

Inserting snap-in adapter 1. Press the button and remove the cover.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, arrow 1, and press downward, arrow 2, until it clicks into place.

Inserting mobile phone

1. Depending on the mobile phone, it may be necessary to remove the protective cap of the antenna connector and from the USB connection of the mobile phone.

2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons fac- ing upward toward the electrical connec- tions and press down until it engages.

Removing mobile phone

Press the button and remove the mobile phone.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Office COMMUNICATIONS

187

Office

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Overview

General information Contacts, appointments, tasks, notes, text mes- sages and mobile phone e-mails can be dis- played using the Control Display if the mobile phone compatibly supports these functions and the required Bluetooth radio standards.

For information about which mobile phones and functions are available, go to www.mini.com/ connectivity.

A limited number of compatible mobile phones are available for Office.

Contents are only displayed completely when the vehicle is stopped.

Only read access to the mobile phone is possi- ble.

Do not use Office while driving. Make entries only when traffic and road condi-

tions permit; otherwise, you may endanger vehicle occupants and other road users by being distracted.<

Requirements > A suitable mobile phone is paired with the

vehicle and connected. In some mobile phones, the data access to the mobile phone must be confirmed.

> Time zones, time, and date, refer to page 66, are correctly adjusted on the Con- trol Display and on the mobile phone in order, for example, to correctly display appointments.

Updating Every time that the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle, data are updated. Appointments, tasks, notes and reminders can be updated sep- arately.

1. "Office"

2. "Current office", "Calendar", "Tasks", "Notes" or "Reminders"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Update data"

Data from the mobile phone are again trans- ferred to the vehicle.

Current office The number of unread messages and active tasks as well as upcoming appointments are dis- played.

1. "Office"

2. "Current office"

3. Select the desired entry to display details.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Office

188

Contacts

General information Contacts can be created and edited. The con- tacts from the mobile phone are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. The addresses can be used as destina- tions for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.

Displaying contacts 1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered.

A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Dialing phone numbers 1. Select the desired contact.

2. Select phone number.

The connection is established.

Editing a contact 1. Select the desired contact.

2. "Edit contact"

3. Change the entry.

4. "Store contact in vehicle"

If a contact is changed, the changes are not stored in the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle, and only this copy is dis- played.

Selecting a contact as a destination 1. Select the desired contact.

2. Select address.

With contacts from the mobile phone, the address must be compared with the naviga- tion data stored in the vehicle. In this case:

Correct the address.

3. "Start guidance" or "Add as another destina- tion"

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a desti- nation.

Mobile phone

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Office COMMUNICATIONS

189

Checking the address as a destination An address that is to be used in route guidance must correspond to the navigation data stored in the vehicle. The address can be checked to ensure this.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Check as destination"

4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.

If the address is corrected and stored, a copy of it is stored in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.

New contact A contact can be associated with up to 8 phone numbers, 2 addresses, 3 e-mail addresses, and one Internet address.

1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

3. Open "Options".

4. "New contact"

5. If input boxes are already filled with previous entries: "Delete input fields"

6. To fill in the entry fields: select the symbol next to the entry field.

7. Enter text and assign a contact type, refer to page 189.

8. When equipped with a navigation system: enter address. It is only possible to enter addresses that are contained in the naviga- tion data stored in the vehicle. This ensures

that route guidance is possible for all addresses.

9. "Accept address" if necessary

10. "Store contact in vehicle"

Contact types Phone numbers and addresses can be assigned various contact types.

Defining a home address It is possible to store a home address. It is listed at the beginning of the contacts.

1. "Home"

2. Create a contact.

3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Selecting name sorting Names can be displayed in different orders.

1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first, last name"

Depending on how the contacts were stored in the mobile phone, the sorting of names can dif- fer from the sorting selected.

Symbol Meaning

Private phone number

Business phone number

Mobile phone number

Other phone number

Private address

Business address

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Office

190

Displaying contact pictures Pictures stored with contacts are stored in the vehicle when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle. The number of pictures transmitted depends on the mobile phone. The mobile phone must support this function.

1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Configure Bluetooth"

5. "Show images"

The display of all contact pictures is activated or deactivated.

Deleting contacts Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone can- not be deleted.

1. "Office"

2. "Contacts"

3. Highlight the contact.

4. "Options"

5. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".

Messages

General information The displaying of text messages and e-mails depends on whether the mobile phone supports transmission to the vehicle. Text messages and e-mails may not be supported by the service provider or the function may have to be sepa- rately activated. After a mobile phone is paired for the first time, the transmission may take sev- eral minutes. Messages are only displayed com- pletely when the vehicle is stopped. Messages from the auxiliary phone are not transmitted.

Displaying messages 1. "Office"

2. "Messages"

Message type A symbol indicates the type of message.

Read message.

Unread message.

Filtering message lists A message list can be filtered if there is more than one message type.

1. "Filter:"

2. Select message type.

> "All" All messages are displayed.

> "Text message" Only text messages from mobile phones are displayed.

> "E-mail" Only text messages from mobile phones are displayed.

Text message

Calling a text message sender 1. Select the desired message.

2. Select the symbol.

Saving sender in the contacts 1. Highlight the desired message.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact"

Using contact data Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes- sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 193.

Symbol Message type

Text message

E-mail from mobile phone

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Office COMMUNICATIONS

191

Reading text messages aloud Reading text messages aloud, refer to page 193.

E-mail

Displaying e-mail 1. "Office"

2. "Messages"

3. Select the desired message.

Displaying e-mail contacts If the sender and receiver of an e-mail were transmitted from a mobile phone, they will be displayed in the e-mail.

"Sender/Recipient"

If the e-mail address is stored in the contacts, then the contact is displayed. Select contact to display details.

If the e-mail address is not stored in the con- tacts, then it may be that only the e-mail address is displayed.

Using contact data Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes- sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 193.

Deactivating entire display When opening an e-mail when in the vehicle, it is completely transferred to the vehicle. This may result in charges.

1. "Office"

2. "Messages"

3. Open "Options".

4. "Fully download e-mails"

Only a part of an e-mail from a mobile phone is loaded into the vehicle.

Reading e-mail Reading e-mail, see page 193.

Calendar

Displaying calendar Appointments from the last 20 days and the next 50 days can be displayed.

1. "Office"

2. "Calendar"

Appointments of the current day are dis- played.

Selecting calendar day 1. Select date.

2. Select desired day or date.

> "Next day"

> "Date:"

> "Previous day"

> "Today"

Displaying appointment 1. Select the desired appointment.

2. To scroll through appointment, if necessary:

> Turn the MINI joystick.

> Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes- sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 193.

Reading an appointment aloud Reading an appointment aloud, refer to page 193.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Office

192

Tasks

Displaying task list Display open tasks that must be completed within the next 90 days.

1. "Office"

2. "Tasks"

Sorting task list 1. Select the top line in the task list.

2. To select sorting criterion:

> "Priority (!)"

> "Subject"

> "Due date"

Displaying task 1. Select the desired task.

2. To scroll through the task, if necessary:

> Turn the MINI joystick.

> Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes- sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 193.

Reading a task aloud Reading a task aloud, refer to page 193.

Notes

Displaying notes 1. "Office"

2. "Notes"

All notes are displayed.

Displaying a note 1. Select the desired note.

2. To scroll through the note, if necessary:

> Turn the MINI joystick.

> Select the symbol.

Using contact data Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes- sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected, see page 193.

Reading a note aloud Reading a note aloud, refer to page 193.

Reminders

Displaying reminders Reminders for imminent appointments and tasks are displayed. After an appointment has passed or a task is due, the reminder is deleted.

1. "Office"

2. "Reminders"

3. Select the desired reminder.

The associated appointment or task is displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Office COMMUNICATIONS

193

Using contact data

Overview Contact data from deadlines, tasks, text mes- sages, e-mails and notes can be stored or selected.

Displaying a contact or dialing a phone number 1. "Use contact data"

2. To display a contact or dial a phone number:

> Select a contact to display a detailed view of the contact.

> Select a phone number to directly estab- lish a connection.

Storing contact data 1. "Use contact data"

2. Highlight a phone number or e-mail address.

3. Open "Options".

4. "Add to existing contact" or "Store as new contact"

Reading aloud Text messages, e-mails, appointment entries, tasks, and notes can be read aloud to you.

1. Select the desired message, appointment, task, or note.

2. Select the symbol.

While the message is being read aloud, you have the following options:

> "Pause"

Interrupt the reading. Select again to resume the reading.

> "Back to beginning"

Read message again from the beginning.

> Select the symbol.

Skip back one paragraph.

> Select the symbol.

Skip over a paragraph.

> To terminate the reading, move the MINI joystick to the left.

What to do if For information on suitable mobile phones, refer to page 174.

> Appointments, tasks, notes, or text mes- sages are not being displayed?

The mobile phone is not suitable for the missing function or is not correctly con- nected.

The mobile phone is connected as an auxil- iary phone.

The Office function is deactivated.

The appointments are older than 20 days and are more than 50 days in the future.

The tasks have been marked as completed or are more than 90 days in the future.

Depending on the number of appointments, tasks, notes, and messages stored in the mobile phone, not all of them are displayed in the vehicle.

> Appointments or tasks from the mobile phone are not being displayed at the correct time?

The time zone, time, or date is incorrectly set in the Control Display and in the mobile phone.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS Office

194

> Texts of entries are not displayed com- pletely?

Texts are already shortened by the mobile phone.

Synchronization between the mobile phone and vehicle can take a few minutes.

> Contact pictures are not being displayed?

Up to max. 200 contact pictures can be stored in the vehicle.

> If you have gone through all items in the list and still cannot activate the desired function please contact the Hotline or your MINI dealer.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MINI Connected COMMUNICATIONS

195

MINI Connected

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Overview

The concept You can use MINI Connected to integrate certain software applications of a suitable mobile phone into your MINI. These software applications are displayed on the Control Display. They are oper- ated using the MINI joystick.

The range of software applications can be coun- try-specific.

Requirements The following requirements must be met for the function of MINI Connected:

> The operating system of the mobile phone must support the software applications of MINI Connected.

> The software applications are installed on the mobile phone and are operational.

> Suitable mobile phone.

> Appropriate mobile phone contract.

Possible additional costs incurred are not included with MINI Connected.

Only make entries when the traffic situa- tion allows you to do so. If you do not

observe this precaution, your being distracted can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users. For safety reasons, some software applications can only be used when the vehicle is stopped.<

Only use software applications approved by the manufacturer of your MINI; other-

wise, malfunctions may result.<

Notes For information on suitable mobile phones, available software applications, and their instal- lation:

> At: www.mini.com/connectivity

> At your MINI dealer.

Connecting a mobile phone

Connecting via the USB audio interface

1 USB interface

2 Connection for audio/video playback: TRS connector 1/8"/3.5 mm

Connect the mobile phone using the special connecting cable, available at your MINI dealer, to the USB interface 1 and the AV-IN connection 2.

To perform other operations on the mobile phone, refer to the Owner's Manual for the mobile phone: e.g. selecting and activating a software application.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

COMMUNICATIONS MINI Connected

196

Connecting via the snap-in adapter The mobile phone can also be connected using the snap-in adapter, refer to page 185.

Using MINI Connected After successful connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle and activation of MINI Connected, the applications are displayed on the Control Display and can be operated using the MINI joy- stick. Volume adjustments can be made using the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10, or using the volume control knob on the radio, refer to page 141.

1. Press the button. This opens the main menu.

2. "MINI Connected"

3. Select the desired software application.

The extent of MINI Connected that is shown on the Control Display depends on the range of installed software applications on the mobile phone.

The data transfer of the software applica- tion from the telephone to the vehicle can

take a few minutes. Some software applications depend on the speed of the available Internet connection for the mobile phone.<

Certain versions of mobile phones used and their software can make it impossible to use MINI Connected and the Bluetooth hands-free system at the same time. After a phone call, it may be necessary to restart the software application on the mobile phone.

PlugIn Selected functions for a compatible Apple device are shown on the Control Display via a video link. Operation is via the MINI joystick and an onboard monitor.

1. Connecting an Apple device.

> via a USB audio interface, refer to page 195.

> via the snap-in adapter, refer to page 185.

2. "MINI Connected"

3. "PlugIn"

4. Select the type of connection: "Activate via AUX connection" or "Activate via Snap-In adapter"

5. "Activate PlugIn"

6. Navigate among the functions shown via a MINI joystick and, e.g., select a desired cate- gory or track.

Press the button to return back or to change to a level higher within the functions of the Apple device.

Press the button twice to return back to the main menu.

Additional information can be found in the MINI Connected Owner's Manual at www.mini.com/connectivity.

Note Audio and video playback from a snap-in adapter may only be possible if there is no cable connected to the AV-In port.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MINI Connected COMMUNICATIONS

197 Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Move Me.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

NAVIGATION

Entertainment

COMMUNICATIONS

REFERENCE

MOBILITY

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Refueling

200

Refueling

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information Switch off the engine before refueling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the

tank and a message will be displayed.<

Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when

handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con- tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident.<

Fuel filler flap

Opening MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

1. Open the fuel filler flap.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Closing Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

Do not pinch the band attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed

properly and fuel vapors can escape. A message will be displayed if the fuel cap is loose or miss- ing.<

Manually releasing the fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can manually release the fuel filler flap:

MINI Countryman:

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Refueling MOBILITY

201

MINI Paceman:

1. Open cargo area trim panel, arrow 1.

2. Pull on the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.

The fuel filler flap opens.

Observe the following when refueling Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when

handling fuel; otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury and property damage.<

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com- pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead to

> premature pump shutoff

> reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov- ery system.

The fuel tank is full when you top off twice after the first time that the fuel pump nozzle clicks off.

Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise, overflowing fuel can cause damage to the

environment and the vehicle.<

Fuel tank capacity If the range displayed is less than 30 miles/50 km, be sure to refuel; other-

wise, engine functions are not guaranteed and damage may occur.<

Approx. 12.3 US gal/47 liters, including the reserve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.

If the engine can no longer be started because of an empty fuel tank, add at least 1.3 US gal/

5 liters of fuel. If the vehicle is at an angle, a larger amount of fuel may be necessary.

Fuel specifications

Gasoline For optimum fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be free of sulfur or as low in sulfur as possible.

Fuels that are labeled at the pump as containing metal may not be used.

Do not fill the tank with leaded gasoline or gasoline that contains metal additives,

such as manganese or iron; otherwise, long term damage to the catalytic converter or other com- ponents may result.<

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of up to 10%, that is, E10, can be used.

The ethanol should meet the following quality standards:

US: ASTM 4806-xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511-xx

xx: Always observe currently valid standards.

Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel con- taining 85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel.

Otherwise, the engine and fuel supply system will be damaged.<

The engine is knocking regulated. Therefore, dif- ferent grades of gasoline can be used for refuel- ing.

Recommended gasoline grades The manufacturer of your MINI recommends:

> AKI 91.

> John Cooper Works: AKI 93.

Minimum quality The manufacturer of your MINI recommends AKI 89.

Do not use any gasoline below the speci- fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise, the

engine could be damaged.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Refueling

202

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

The use of poor quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-

tionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environ- mental conditions such as high ambient temper- atures and high altitudes, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered, we rec- ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade - AKI number - for a few tankfuls. To avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in a need for unscheduled mainte- nance.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

203

Wheels and tires

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Tire inflation pressures

Information for your safety It is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pres- sure.

Checking pressure Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a

month and before starting long trips. If you fail to observe this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that can not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident. Do not drive with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using run- flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of control over the vehicle.<

Check the tire inflation pressures only on cold tires. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/ 2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

After adjusting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, page 75,

or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, page 78.<

Pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.

The tire inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and the tire brands

recommended by the manufacturer of your MINI. Your MINI dealer will be glad to advise you.<

For correct identification of the right tire infla- tion pressures, observe the following:

> Tire sizes for your vehicle

> Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pres- sures listed on the following pages in the col- umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of 100 mph or 160 km/h.

These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's door is open.

MINI Countryman:

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

204

MINI Paceman:

The maximum permitted speed for these tire inflation pressures is 100 mph or

160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, tire damage and accidents may occur.<

Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust

pressures to the respective tire inflation pres- sures listed on the following pages in the col- umns for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.<

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits; otherwise, violations of the law could occur.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

205

Tire inflation pressures MINI Cooper Countryman

Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi

Speeds up to a max. of 100 mph / 160 km/h

Speeds including those exceeding

100 mph / 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/psi for cold tires. Cold = ambient temper- ature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 248.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

206

Tire inflation pressures MINI Cooper S Countryman / Cooper S ALL4 Countryman

Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi

Speeds up to a max. of 100 mph / 160 km/h

Speeds including those exceeding

100 mph / 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/psi for cold tires. Cold = ambient temper- ature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 248.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

207

MINI Countryman John Cooper Works tire inflation pressures

Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi

Speeds up to a max. of 100 mph / 160 km/h

Speeds including those exceeding

100 mph / 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/psi for cold tires. Cold = ambient temper- ature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.4/35 2.4/35 2.6/38 2.6/38

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 248.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

208

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper

Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi

Speeds up to a max. of 100 mph / 160 km/h

Speeds including those exceeding

100 mph / 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/psi for cold tires. Cold = ambient temper- ature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 248.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

209

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper S / Paceman Cooper S ALL4

Tire size Tire pressures in bar/psi

Speeds up to a max. of 100 mph / 160 km/h

Speeds including those exceeding

100 mph / 160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in bar/psi for cold tires. Cold = ambient temper- ature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC 205/55 R 17 91 V RSC 225/45 R 18 91 V RSC 225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 248.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

210

Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size

Speed letter Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h

T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.

DOT code:

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Tread wear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition

to these grades.<

Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, how- ever, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under con- trolled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, corner- ing, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteris- tics.<

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus- tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire

e.g.

Nominal width in mm Aspect ratio in Radial belt construction Rim diameter in inches Load rating, (not on ZR tires) Speed code letter, (before the R on ZR tires)

225/45 R 17 91 V

For instance:

Manufacturer's code for tire make tire size and tire design Tire age

DOT xxxx xxx 1012

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

211

failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent lev- els of performance on the laboratory test wheel that exceed the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep- arately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.<

RSC - run-flat tires You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, page 212.

M+S Winter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than sum- mer tires.

XL Designation for specially reinforced tires.

Tire condition Inspect your tires regularly for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.

Tread depth The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/ 3 mm, although, for example, European legisla- tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/ 3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface.

Winter tires When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less

suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of safety, new tires should be installed.

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove are distributed around the tire's circumference; the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate these wear indicators. If the tire tread has been driven down to the wear indicators, a tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been reached.

Tire damage Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs, and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires, and sus- pension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low- profile tires.

Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam- ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same applies to any other abnormal road behavior, such as pulling severely to the right or left.

In these cases, reduce speed immediately and have wheels and tires thoroughly

checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest MINI dealer or a specialized tire shop that has specially trained personnel working in accor- dance with the specifications of the MINI manu- facturer. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Wheels and tires

212

Otherwise, tire damage can be extremely dan- gerous for vehicle occupants and other road users.<

Tire age The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT ... 1012 means that the tire was manufac- tured during the 10th week of 2012.

For various reasons, such as the development of brittleness, the manufacturer of your MINI rec- ommends tire replacement after no more than 6 years, regardless of the actual wear of the tires.

Run-flat tires

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall. Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self-sup- porting tire and a special rim. The reinforcement in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can con- tinue to be used subject to certain restrictions, even if depressurized.

For information on continuing to drive with a flat tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 76.

New wheels and tires Have new wheels and tires mounted only by your MINI dealer or a specialized tire

shop that has specially trained personnel work- ing in accordance with the specifications of the MINI manufacturer. If this work is not carried out

properly, there is a danger of subsequent dam- age and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.<

Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your MINI recom- mends that you avoid using retreaded

tires, as this could impair driving safety. The causes for this include potentially different tire casing structures and often wide variations in tire age, which can result in a limited service life.<

Correct wheels and tires The manufacturer of your MINI recom- mends mounting only wheels and tires

that it has specifically approved for use on your particular model. Although other wheels and tires may theoretically have the same dimen- sions, variations in factors such as manufactur- ing tolerances can result in contact between tire and bodywork, ultimately leading to serious accidents. The manufacturer of your MINI can- not evaluate non-approved wheels and tires to determine if they are suited for use, and there- fore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they are mounted.<

Your MINI dealer will be glad to inform you about the correct wheel and tire combination for your vehicle.

The correct combination of wheels and tires is also necessary to ensure reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS and DSC.

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single brand and tread configuration. After a tire has been dam- aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi- nation again as soon as possible.

Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM electronics When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Wheels and tires MOBILITY

213

puncture, refer to page 78. Your MINI dealer will be glad to advise you.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your MINI recommends certain tire brands. They are marked with a clearly visible MINI designation on the sidewall of the tire.

When properly used, these tires meet the high- est standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics.

Run-flat tires When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount run-flat tires for your own safety. Keep in mind that no space-saver spare tire is available in the event of a flat. Your MINI dealer will be glad to advise you.

Special characteristics of winter tires The manufacturer of your MINI recommends the use of winter tires on snowy roads or if temper- atures drop below 457/+76. Although all- season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-weather performance as winter tires.

Pay attention to speed Always comply with the speed limit for the winter tires mounted on your car; failure

to do so could result in tire damage and acci- dents.<

If the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the mounted tires must be displayed in your field of view. This label is available at your tire dealer or MINI dealer.

Storage Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres- sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Swapping wheels among the axles Depending on the individual use, front and rear tires may exhibit different wear and tear.

In order to maintain an even wear and tear, the wheels may be rotated between the axles. Your MINI dealer will be glad to advise you.

Always check the inflation pressure after the tire rotation, if necessary change the pressure.

Snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your MINI, classified as road-safe and recommended. Con- tact your MINI dealer for more details.

Only attach snow chains in pairs to the front wheels with the following tires.

> 195/60 R 16 M+S

Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the

instrument might issue an incorrect reading. When driving with snow chains, it can be useful to briefly deactivate DSC or activate DTC, refer to page 73.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Engine compartment

214

Engine compartment

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without

the required professional technical training. If you do not know how to follow the specified instructions, then have the work carried out by your MINI dealer. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent dam- age and related safety hazards.<

Important parts of the engine compartment

1 Vehicle identification number

2 Battery, under the cover 237

3 Engine oil dipstick 215

4 Engine oil filler neck 216

5 Coolant expansion tank 217

6 Engine compartment fuse box 234

7 Reservoir for washer fluid for the headlamp and window washer system 57

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Engine compartment MOBILITY

215

Hood

Releasing

Pull the lever.

Do not clean the windshield and head- lamps if the hood is unlocked as this may

damage the headlamp washer system.<

Opening

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield

before you open the hood.<

Press the release handle and open the hood.

Closing

Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/ 40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.

If you notice any signs while driving your vehicle that the hood is not completely

closed, stop at once and close it securely. Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.<

Engine oil Engine oil consumption depends on driving style and operating conditions, e.g., with a very sporty driving style, the engine oil consumption is significantly increased.

Therefore, check the engine oil level regularly after each refueling.

Checking engine oil level 1. With the vehicle's engine at normal operat-

ing temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted driving for at least 6 miles/10 km, park the vehicle on a level surface.

2. Switch off the engine.

3. Pull the dipstick out after approx. 5 minutes and wipe it off with a lint-free cloth, paper towel or similar material.

4. Carefully push the dipstick all the way into the guide tube and pull it out again. The oil level should be between the two marks on the dipstick.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Engine compartment

216

The oil quantity corresponding to the difference between the two marks on the dipstick is 1 US quart/1 liter.

Do not fill beyond the upper mark on the dipstick. Excess oil will damage the

engine.<

Adding engine oil

Do not add the maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until the oil level has dropped to just above the lower mark on the dipstick, page 215.

Add oil within the next 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine could be dam-

aged.<

If too much motor oil is added, immedi- ately have the vehicle checked; otherwise,

damage to the engine may result.<

Keep oils, grease, etc. out of the reach of children and comply with the warnings on

the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may result.<

Oil types for refilling

Notes Do not use oil additives as this could result in engine damage.<

When choosing oil, make sure that it belongs to one of the SAE viscosity classes

0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 and 5W-30; otherwise, malfunctions and damage to the engine may result.<

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.

Some types of oil may not be available in every country.

Approved oil types

Additional information on approved types of oil can be found at a MINI dealer.

Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/1 liter of another oil with the fol- lowing specification may be used:

Gasoline engines

BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30

BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Gasoline engines

API SM or higher specifications

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Engine compartment MOBILITY

217

Oil change Only MINI dealers are to perform oil changes.

Coolant Coolant consists of half water and half additive. Not all commercially available additives are suit- able for your MINI. Your MINI dealer knows which additives are suitable and will be glad to advise you.

Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may result. Because addi-

tives are harmful to your health, it is important to follow the instructions on the containers.<

Comply with the appropriate environmen- tal protection regulations when disposing

of coolant additives.<

Coolant temperature A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and therefore the engine, becomes too hot. A message appears on the Control Display.

Checking coolant level Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant

can cause burns.<

Do not open the hood until the engine has cooled down.

The coolant level is correct if it is between the Min and Max markings.

Topping off 1. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little

counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to open.

2. Slowly fill to the correct fluid level; do not overfill.

3. Close by turning the cap.

Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Maintenance

218

Maintenance

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

MINI Maintenance System

The MINI Maintenance System supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your MINI. The objective is to optimize efforts with respect to minimal vehicle maintenance costs.

If and when you come to sell your MINI, a com- prehensive record of servicing will prove a signif- icant benefit.

Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take the different driving conditions of your MINI into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.

On the Control Display, you can have the remaining times or distances for selected main- tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates displayed, page 64.

Service data in the remote control Your vehicle continuously stores service- requirement information in the remote control while you are driving. Your MINI dealer can read out this data from the remote control unit, and propose an optimized maintenance approach. Whenever you take your car in for servicing you should therefore hand your MINI dealer the remote control unit that you last used.

Make sure that the date is always set cor- rectly, page 67; otherwise, the effective-

ness of Condition Based Service CBS is not assured.<

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements.

The manufacturer of the MINI recom- mends that you have service and repair

operations performed at your MINI dealer. Take the time to ensure that these service pro- cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi- cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries ver- ify that your vehicle has received the specified regular maintenance.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Maintenance MOBILITY

219

Socket for On-Board Diagnosis OBD

The primary components that make up the emissions can be checked by a device via the OBD socket.

Emissions The warning lamps come on. The vehicle is producing higher emissions. You can continue your journey, but moderate your speed and exercise due caution.

Have the car checked as soon as possible.

Under certain circumstances, one of the lamps will flash or light up continuously. This indicates excessive misfiring or a malfunction in the engine. If this happens, reduce your speed and visit the nearest MINI dealer as soon as possible. Severe misfiring can quickly lead to serious dam- age of emissions-related components, espe- cially the catalytic converter. In addition, mechanical engine components can become damaged.

If the fuel cap is not properly tightened, the OBD system may conclude that fuel vapors are escaping, causing an indica-

tor to light up. If the fuel cap is then tightened, the indicator should go out within a few days.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Care

220

Care

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Car-care products Regular cleaning and care helps to maintain the value of your MINI.

The manufacturer of your MINI recommends using manufacturer-approved products to clean and care for your vehicle.

Your MINI dealer would be pleased to advise you on cleaning and care products and services for your MINI.

The ingredients of original MINI Care Prod- ucts have been tested, and the products

have been tested in the laboratory and in prac- tice. They offer optimum care and protection for your vehicle.<

Do not use any cleansers containing alco- hol or solvents as these may cause dam-

age.<

Cleaning agents may contain hazardous or health-damaging substances. Follow

the warning and hazard instructions on the packaging. For interior cleaning, always open the doors or windows of the vehicle. Do not use any products that are not intended for cleaning the vehicle.<

External care

Washing your vehicle Especially during the winter months the vehicle should be frequently washed. Dirt

and road salt can damage the vehicle.<

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise,

water can reduce braking efficiency over the short term and the brake rotors can corrode.<

Regularly open the hood and clear out any debris such as leaves that may have collected in the region of the windshield.

Car washes Preference should be given to cloth car washes.

Do not use automatic high-pressure car washes; otherwise, water may drip into

the vehicle around the windows.<

Before driving into the car wash, check if the sys- tem is suitable for your MINI. Observe the fol- lowing points:

> Vehicle dimensions, page 246

> If necessary: fold in the outside mirrors, page 44

> Maximum permissible tire width

Avoid car washes with tracks higher than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the chassis could

be damaged.<

Preparations for driving into the car wash:

> Unscrew the rod antenna.

> Deactivate the rain sensor to prevent unin- tentional wiping.

> Deactivate rear window wiper and protect it from damage. Ask the car wash operator about measures that can be taken to protect the wipers.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Care MOBILITY

221

> Remove additional attachments, e.g. spoil- ers or telephone antennas, if there is a pos- sibility that they could be damaged.

> Insert the remote control into the ignition lock.

Automatic transmission Before driving into the car wash, make sure that the vehicle can roll:

1. Place the remote control, even with Comfort Access, in the ignition lock.

2. Move the selector lever to position N.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Switch off the engine.

5. Insert the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll.

Steam jets/high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, make sure that you maintain suf-

ficient distance from the vehicle and do not exceed a maximum temperature of 1407/ 606. If the distance is too close, the pressure too high, or the temperature too high, parts of the vehicle can be damaged, or water can penetrate. Observe the operating instructions for high- pressure washers.<

Do not spray sensors such as the Park Dis- tance Control with high-pressure washers

for a long time and maintain the greatest possi- ble distance of approx. 1 ft/30 cm from them.<

Manual washing Use a great deal of water and, if necessary, car shampoo when washing your car by hand. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or a washing brush applying a slight amount of pressure.

Before cleaning the windshield, deacti- vate the rain sensor or turn off the ignition

to prevent unintentional wiping.<

Observe local regulations regarding wash- ing vehicles by hand.<

Headlamps Do not wipe dry and do not use abrasive or cor- rosive cleaning agents. Remove dirt and con- tamination, such as insects, by soaking with shampoo and then washing with plenty of water.

Do not remove accumulated ice and snow with an ice scraper; use window deicers instead.

Windows Clean the outside and inside of the windows and mirrors with a window cleaner.

Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners containing quartz.<

Wiper blades Clean with soapy water and change regularly to prevent the formation of streaks.

Wax, preservatives and dirt on the win- dows cause streaks when the windshield

wipers are on, and can cause premature wear of the wiper blades and interfere with the rain sen- sor.<

Paintwork, care Regular care helps your vehicle retain its value and protects the paint from the long-term effects of aggressive substances.

Environmental influences in areas with increased air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree sap or pollen, can affect the vehicle paintwork. It is therefore important to adjust the frequency and extent of vehicle care corre- spondingly.

Immediately remove any particularly aggressive substances, such as fuel that has overflowed, oil, grease, brake fluid, or bird droppings; otherwise, paint damage can be caused.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Care

222

Removing paintwork damage Depending on the severity of the damage, immediately repair stone damage or

scratches to prevent rusting.<

The manufacturer of the MINI recommends repairing paint damage professionally according to factory specifications with original MINI paints.

Preservation Preservation is necessary when water no longer beads on the clean paint surface. To preserve the paint, only use preservatives that contain carnauba or synthetic waxes.

Rubber seals Only treat with water or rubber care products.

Do not use silicon sprays or other silicon- containing care products on rubber seals;

otherwise, noise and damage could occur.<

Chrome parts Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radiator grill and door handles with copious quantities of water and, if necessary, a shampoo additive, especially when contaminated with road salt. For additional treatment, use chrome polish.

Light alloy wheels The system produces brake dust that collects on the light alloy wheels. Clean them regularly with acid-free wheel cleaner.

Do not use aggressive, acid-containing, highly alkaline, or abrasive cleansers or

steam jets hotter than 1407/606 as they may cause damage.<

External sensors Keep the outside sensors on the vehicle such as the Park Distance Control clean

and ice-free to ensure that they function prop- erly.<

Internal care

Upholstery/fabrics Regularly use a vacuum cleaner to remove sur- face dirt.

In case of serious spots such as liquid stains, use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth and suitable interior cleaners. Observe the instruc- tions on the packaging.

Clean upholstery up to the seams. Do not rub forcefully.<

Velcro fasteners on pants or other items of clothing can damage seat covers. Make

sure that all Velcro fasteners are closed.<

Leather/leather coverings The leather processed by the manufac- turer of your MINI is a high-quality natural

product. Light variations in the grain is one of the typical properties of natural leather.<

Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the leather have an abrasive effect, leading to increased wear and causing the leather surface to become brittle prematurely. Use a cloth or vacuum cleaner to remove dust on a regular basis.

Especially when the leather has a light color, it should be cleaned regularly since it tends to get heavily soiled.

Treat the leather twice a year using a leather lotion since dirt and grease will gradually attack the leather's protective layer.

Carpets/floor mats Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects out of the movement range of the pedals;

otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the pedals during driving. Do not place additional floor mats onto an exist- ing one or onto other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened. Make sure that the floor mats are securely fas-

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Care MOBILITY

223

tened again after they have been removed, e.g. for cleaning.<

Floor mats can be removed to be cleaned.

If the carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfi- ber cloth and water or an interior cleaner. When doing so, rub forward and back in the driving direction; otherwise, the carpet may become matted.

Interior plastic parts These include:

> Plastic surfaces

> Lamp glass

> Display panes

> Mat parts

Only clean with water and, if necessary, solvent- free plastic cleaners.

Do not use solvents such as alcohol, lac- quer thinner, cold cleaners, fuel, or similar,

as these will damage the surfaces.<

Decorative strips Only clean decorative strips and fine wood parts with damp cloths. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.

Safety belts Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Do not clean chemically, as this may destroy the webbing.<

Displays To clean displays, such as the radio or display elements, use an anti-static microfiber cloth.

Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning the display as this can cause damage.<

Do not use chemical or abrasive house- hold cleaning agents. Keep fluids of any

kind away from the device. Surfaces or electrical components may otherwise become corroded or damaged.<

CD/DVD drives Do not use cleaning CDs as this could damage parts of the drive.<

Vehicle storage If you park your vehicle longer than three months, ask your MINI dealer to advise you.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Replacing components

224

Replacing components

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Wiper blades Do not place windshield wipers on the windshield if wiper blades are not

installed; otherwise, the windshield may be damaged.<

Changing the front wiper blades 1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.

2. Compress the locking spring, arrows 1, and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.

3. Pull the wiper blade forward and out of the catch mechanism.

4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixture until it engages audibly.

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield

before you open the hood.<

Changing the rear wiper blade MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.

2. Rotate the wiper blade toward the back as far as it will go, arrow.

3. Press the wiper blade against the limit and thus out of the mounting.

4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixture until it engages audibly.

Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be handled carefully. The manufacturer of your MINI recommends having your MINI dealer per- form any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Replacing components MOBILITY

225

Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute

amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.<

You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your MINI dealer.

Only replace bulbs after they have cooled down; otherwise, you may burn your fin-

gers.<

When working on electrical systems, always begin by switching off the con-

sumer in question; otherwise, short circuits could result. To avoid possible injury or equip- ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufac- turer.<

Caring for headlamps, refer to page 221.

For any bulb replacement not described below, contact a MINI dealer or a work-

shop that has specially trained personnel work- ing in accordance with the specifications of the MINI manufacturer.<

For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your MINI dealer.<

Light-emitting diodes LEDs Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu- cent lenses serve as the light sources for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes are related to conven- tional laser diodes, and legislation defines them as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source

for several hours; otherwise, this could cause irritation of the retina.<

Headlamp glass lens In cool or humid weather, condensation may occur on the interiors of the headlamps. During trips with the headlamps on, the condensation disappears after a short time. The headlamps do not need to be changed. Do not remove the condensation from head- lamps, despite driving with lights on, and if con- densation increases, e.g., because of water droplets, have this checked by your MINI dealer.

Xenon lamps The service life of these bulbs is very long and the probability of failure very low, provided that they are not switched on and off an excessive number of times. If a xenon lamp fails neverthe- less, switch on the fog lamps and continue the journey with great care, provided that local leg- islation does not prohibit this.

Work on the xenon lighting system, including lamp replacement, is only to be

carried out only by your MINI dealer. Due to high voltage, there is a risk of fatal injury if work on the xenon lamps is carried out improperly.<

Halogen low beams and high beams H13 bulb, 60/55 watts

The H13 bulb is pressurized. Therefore, wear safety glasses and protective gloves.

Otherwise, there is a risk of injury if the bulb is damaged.<

Be careful when installing the cover; oth- erwise, leaks could occur and cause dam-

age to the headlamp system.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Replacing components

226

Accessing the lamp from the engine compartment The low-beam/high-beam bulb can be changed from the engine compartment.

Removing the cover:

1. Press the tab.

2. Flip open the cover and take it out of the holder.

Follow the same steps in reverse order to reat- tach the cover.

Replacing the bulb 1. Turn the lamp counterclockwise, arrow 1,

and remove it, arrow 2.

2. Push on the catch, arrow 1, and disconnect the connector, arrow 2.

3. To insert the new bulb and replace the cover, proceed in reverse order.

Turn signals, parking lamps, roadside parking lamps, and fog lamps

Accessing the lamps via the wheel well

1 Turn signal

2 Parking/roadside parking/fog lamps

Replacing a turn signal bulb 21 watt bulb, P21W, if necessary PY 21 W

1. Turn in the wheel.

2. Remove cover 1. To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.

3. Remove the inside cover. To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Replacing components MOBILITY

227

4. Unscrew the bulb counterclockwise.

5. To insert the new bulb and replace the cov- ers, proceed in reverse order.

Replacing a parking/roadside parking lamp bulb 5 watt bulb, W 5 W

1. Turn in the wheel.

2. Remove cover 2. To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.

3. Unscrew the upper bulb counterclockwise.

4. To insert the new bulb and replace the cover, proceed in reverse order.

Replacing a fog lamp bulb H8 bulb, 35 watts

1. Turn in the wheel.

2. Remove cover 2. To do so, turn the cover counterclockwise.

3. Detach the cable connector.

4. Unscrew the lower bulb counterclockwise.

5. To insert the new bulb and replace the cover, proceed in reverse order.

Side turn signals 5 watt bulb, W 5 W

1. Open hood.

2. Squeeze clamping clip, arrows, and remove bulb holder.

3. Unscrew bulb counterclockwise and replace.

4. To insert the new bulb and replace the cover, proceed in reverse order.

Side marker lamps Have these bulbs replaced by your MINI dealer.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Replacing components

228

Tail lamps Bulb P 21 W

MINI Countryman:

1 Brake/tail lamp

2 Turn signal

3 Brake/tail lamp

4 Backup lamps

5 Backup lamps

MINI Paceman:

1 Brake light

2 Rear lamp

3 Turn signal

4 Backup lamps

Changing All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder.

MINI Countryman:

1. Switch off the light and remove the infrared remote control from the ignition lock.

2. Open the tailgate,

3. Push the cover panel out from the rear of the cargo area side trim panel and remove it.

4. Open emergency release for the fuel filler flap, see page 200, and then push to the side with the foam insert. Ensure that the emergency release is not damaged.

5. Disengage the bulb holder by pressing down on the clamping clip, arrow 1.

6. Take out bulb holder and pull out cable, arrow 2.

7. Exerting gentle pressure, turn bulb to the left and remove.

8. To insert the new bulb and install the bulb holder, proceed in reverse order. Ensure that the lamp holder engages in all the fasteners.

9. Put foam insert in its original position and install the emergency fuel flap release.

10. Install cover.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Replacing components MOBILITY

229

MINI Paceman:

1. Switch off the light and remove the infrared remote control from the ignition lock.

2. Open the tailgate,

3. Remove the cover from the luggage com- partment side panel.

4. Unlock the retaining element, arrow 1, by turning it.

5. Remove the screws, arrow 2, using the hex wrench from the vehicle document case.

6. Remove the tail lamp.

7. Disengage the bulb holder by pressing down on the clamping clip, arrow 1.

8. Take out bulb holder and pull out cable, arrow 2.

9. Exerting gentle pressure, turn bulb to the left and remove.

10. To insert the new bulb and install the bulb holder, proceed in reverse order. Ensure that the lamp holder engages in all the fasteners.

License plate lamps 5 watt bulb, C 5 W

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

1. Using a screwdriver, push the lamp to the left in the tab of the lamp housing, arrow 1.

2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Insert the lamp.

Center brake lamp This lamp uses LED technology for operation. In the event of a malfunction, contact your MINI dealer or a workshop that has specially trained personnel working in accordance with the spec- ifications of your MINI manufacturer.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Replacing components

230

Repairing a flat tire Safety measures in the event of a break- down:

Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic and switch on the hazard warning flash- ers. Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock. Engage the parking brake and shift into 1st or reverse gear or place the selector lever in position P. All passengers should be outside the vehicle and in a safe place, e.g. behind a guardrail. Erect a warning triangle or warning flasher at the appropriate distance if necessary. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.<

In the event of a flat tire, different procedures should be followed depending on the equip- ment included in your vehicle:

> MINI Mobility Kit, refer to the following sec- tion

> Run-flat tires, page 212

MINI Mobility Kit The Mobility Kit is located under the left front seat.

Preparations Use of the MINI Mobility Kit may be ineffective if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 in/4 mm or more. Contact the nearest MINI dealer if the tire cannot be made drivable with the Mobility Kit.

Do not remove foreign bodies which have pen- etrated the tire if possible.

Follow the instructions on using the Mobil- ity Kit found on the compressor and the

sealant bottle.<

Remove the adhesive label for the speed limit from the sealant bottle and affix it to the steer- ing wheel.

Sealant and compressor

1 Sealant bottle and adhesive label with speed limit

2 Filling hose

Note the use-by date on the sealant bot- tle.<

3 Holder for the sealant bottle

4 Compressor

5 Plug and cable for the socket in the vehicle interior, page 101

6 Connection hose to connect the compressor and sealant bottle or the compressor and wheel

7 On/off switch

8 Pressure gauge for indicating the tire infla- tion pressure

9 Release button for reducing the tire inflation pressure

Connector, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Replacing components MOBILITY

231

Using the Mobility Kit To repair a tire puncture with the Mobility Kit, proceed as follows:

> Filling the tire with sealant.

> Distributing the sealant.

> Correct the tire inflation pressure.

Filling the tire with sealant Proceed in the specified order; otherwise, sealant may emerge under high pres-

sure.<

1. Shake the sealant bottle.

2. Pull the connecting hose 6 completely out of the compressor housing and screw it onto the connector of the sealant bottle. Make sure that the hose is not kinked.

3. Insert the sealant bottle on the compressor housing in an upright position.

4. Unscrew the dust cap from the valve of the defective wheel and screw the filling hose 2 of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

5. Ensure that the compressor is switched off.

6. Insert the plug 5 into the lighter socket/ power socket in the vehicle interior, page 101.

7. With the engine running: Switch on the compressor and let run for about 3 to 8 minutes in order to add the sealant and to achieve an inflation pressure of about 1.8 bar/26 psi.

When adding sealant, the filling pres- sure can temporarily increase up to

about 5 bar/73 psi. Do not switch off the compressor during this phase.<

Do not run the compressor for longer than 10 minutes; otherwise, the

device will overheat and possibly be dam- aged.<

8. Switch off the compressor.

If an inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is not reached:

1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheel and drive the vehicle forward and backward approx. 33 ft/10 m to distribute the liquid sealant in the tire evenly.

2. Inflate the tire again with the compressor.

If an inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi still cannot be reached, then the tire is too

heavily damaged. Please contact the nearest MINI dealer.<

Stowing Mobility Kit 1. Unscrew filler hose 2 of the sealant bottle

from the wheel.

2. Unscrew connecting hose of the compressor 6 from the sealant bottle.

3. Connect the filler hose 2 of the sealant bot- tle to the unoccupied connection on the sealant bottle. This prevents the rest of the sealant from escaping from the bottle.

4. Wrap the empty sealant bottle in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.

5. Stow Mobility Kit back in the vehicle.

Distributing the sealant Immediately drive approx. 3.1 miles/5 km so that the sealant evenly distributes itself.

Do not exceed speeds of 50 mph/ 80 km/h.

If possible, do not drop below 10 mph/ 20 km/h.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Replacing components

232

Correct the tire inflation pressure 1. After driving approx. 3.1 miles/5 km or

ten minutes, stop at a suitable location.

2. Screw the connection hose 6 of the com- pressor directly onto the tire valve.

3. Insert the plug 5 into the power socket in the vehicle interior.

4. Adjust tire pressure to 1.8 bar/26 psi. With the engine running:

> To increase the inflation pressure: switch on the compressor. To check the current infla- tion pressure, switch off the compressor.

Do not run the compressor for longer than 10 minutes; otherwise, the

device will overheat and possibly be dam- aged.<

> To decrease the inflation pressure: press the release button 9.

If the tire cannot maintain the inflation pressure, drive the vehicle again, refer to

Distributing the sealant. Then repeat steps 1 to 4. If an inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi still can- not be reached, then the tire is too heavily dam- aged. Contact your nearest MINI dealer.<

Driving on Do not exceed the permitted maximum speed of 50 mph/80 km/h; doing so may

result in an accident.<

Replace the defective tire as soon as possible and have the new wheel/tire assembly bal- anced.

Have the Mobility Kit refilled.

Changing wheels The tire change set is available from as an optional accessory at your MINI dealer.

Preparing for a wheel change Observe the safety precautions regarding flat tires on page 230.<

Additional safety measures when chang- ing tires:

Only change the tire when parked on a surface that is level, firm and not slippery. The vehicle or the jack could slip sideways on soft or slippery support surfaces, such as snow, ice, flagstones, etc. Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a support base for the jack, as this would prevent it from extending to its full support height and reduce its load-carrying capacity. Do not lie under the vehicle or start the engine when the vehicle is supported by the jack; other- wise, there is a risk of fatal injury.<

1. Place the foldable chock behind the front wheel on the other side of the vehicle or in front of the wheel if the vehicle is on an incline. If the wheel is changed on a surface with a more severe slope, take additional precautions to secure the vehicle from roll- ing.

2. Uncover the lug bolts if necessary.

3. Loosen the lug bolts by a half turn.

Jacking up the vehicle The vehicle jack is designed for changing wheels only. Do not attempt to raise

another vehicle model with it or to raise any load of any kind. To do so could cause accidents and personal injury.<

1. Place the jack at the jacking point closest to the wheel. The jack base must be perpendicular to the surface beneath the jacking point.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Replacing components MOBILITY

233

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

2. Slide reversible ratchet onto the fixture on the jack, arrow 1.

3. As you ratchet up the jack, place the jack head onto the lifting point on the body, arrow 2.

4. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are changing is raised off the ground.

Mounting the wheel 1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the

wheel.

2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from the mounting surfaces of the wheel and hub. Clean the lug bolts.

3. Lift the new wheel into place.

4. Screw at least two lug bolts finger-tight into opposite bolt holes.

5. Screw in the remaining bolts.

6. Tighten all the lug bolts firmly in a diagonal pattern.

7. Lower the vehicle.

8. Remove the jack.

Tightening the lug bolts Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.

Immediately have the wheels checked with a calibrated torque wrench to ensure

that the lug bolts are firmly seated. Otherwise, incorrectly tightened lug bolts can present a safety hazard.<

Tightening torque: 103.3 lb ft or 140 Nm.

Replace the defective tire as soon as possible and have the new wheel/tire assembly bal- anced.

Vehicle battery

Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free; that is, the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli- mate.

If you have any questions regarding your bat- tery, please contact your MINI dealer.

Battery replacement Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manu-

facturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be dam- aged and systems or functions may not be fully available.<

After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your MINI dealer to ensure that all convenience functions are fully available and, if necessary, the corresponding

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Replacing components

234

Check Control messages are no longer dis- played.

Charging the battery

Note Do not connect battery chargers to the sockets installed in the vehicle at the fac-

tory; otherwise you may cause damage to the battery.<

Only charge the battery in the vehicle when the engine is off. Connections, refer to Jump-start- ing on page 236.

General information To guarantee the full service life of the battery, make sure that the battery is always properly charged.

It may be necessary to charge the battery in the following situations:

> If frequent short trips are taken.

> If the vehicle is frequently parked for more than a month.

Disposal After replacing old batteries, return the used batteries to your MINI dealer or to a

recycling center. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Always secure the battery against tipping over during transport.<

Power failure After a temporary power loss, some equipment may not be fully functional and may require ini- tialization. Individual settings are also lost and must be reprogrammed:

> Time and date These values must be updated, page 66.

> Radio In some cases, stations may have to be stored again, page 143.

> Onboard monitor Operability must be waited for, page 118.

> Glass sunroof, electric It may only be possible to tilt the sunroof, if applicable. The system must be initialized. Contact your nearest MINI dealer.

Indicator and warning lamps Lights up in red:

Battery is no longer being charged. Alternator malfunction.

Switch off all unnecessary electrical consumers. Have the battery checked without delay.

Lights up in yellow:

Battery charge level very low, battery aged, or battery not securely con-

nected.

Charge it by taking a longer drive or by using an external charger. If the display appears again, have the battery checked as soon as possible.

Fuses Do not attempt to repair a blown fuse or replace it with a fuse of a different color or

Ampere rating. To do this could cause a fire in the vehicle resulting from a circuit overload. Have fuses replaced by your MINI dealer.<

A fuse assignment diagram is located on the inside of the fuse box cover panels.

In the engine compartment

Opening the cover Press the latch.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Replacing components MOBILITY

235

In the vehicle interior

On the right side of the footwell.

Opening the cover Press out at the recess.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Giving and receiving assistance

236

Giving and receiving assistance

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance is available by phone 24 hours a day in many countries. You can obtain assistance there in the event of a vehicle breakdown.

First aid pouch Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life. Therefore, check the expiration dates of the contents regu- larly and replace any items in good time, if nec- essary.

The first aid pouch is located on the rear cargo well by the left side trim panel or under the pull- out floor panel.

Warning triangle

In the cargo area under the loading sill.

To remove, open the two clasps.

Jump-starting If the car's own battery is flat, your MINI's engine can be started by connecting two jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.

Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-

dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow- ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible per- sonal injuries.<

Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi-

cle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi- mately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the support vehicle.

3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.

There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,

there is a danger of shorting.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Giving and receiving assistance MOBILITY

237

Connecting jumper cables Connect the jumper cables in the correct order, so that no sparks which could cause

injury occur.<

1. Open the battery cover in the engine com- partment to access the positive terminal of your MINI.

2. Release the tabs on the left and right sides of the positive terminal cover, arrows 1, and lift the cover to open, arrow 2.

3. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

4. Attach the second terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

5. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/ jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle.

Body ground in MINI:

6. Attach the second terminal clamp of the minus/ jumper cable to the negative termi- nal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine 1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and

allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly increased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle to be started in the usual manner. If the first start attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the above connecting sequence.

If necessary, have the battery checked and recharged.

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.<

Tow-starting, towing away

Observe applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing.<

Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being

towed.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Giving and receiving assistance

238

Using a tow fitting The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or at the right rear.

Depending upon the vehicle features, the tow fitting is located

> under the right or left front seat.

> in the pouch for the tire-changing set in the luggage compartment.

Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the

tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<

Access to screw thread Press sideways on the cover, vehicle outer side. This will push out the opposite side of the cover, which can then be removed.

Front

Rear MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Being towed Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 50; otherwise, the low

beams, tail lamps, turn signals, and windshield wipers may be unavailable. Do not tow the vehi- cle with just the rear axle raised, as this would allow the steering to turn.<

There is no power assist while the engine is off. Thus, braking and steering will require increased effort.

Switch on the hazard warning flashers, depend- ing on local regulations.

Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Automatic transmission Tow vehicles with automatic transmission only with a tow truck or with the front

wheels lifted; otherwise, the transmission can be damaged.<

Towing methods Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body and chassis parts, otherwise damage may

result.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Giving and receiving assistance MOBILITY

239

With towbar The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may

be impossible to maintain control.<

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please observe the following:

> Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.

> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset.

Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings, as attachment to other vehicle parts can

lead to damage.<

With tow rope When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when

towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage.<

With tow truck: vehicles without ALL4 all-wheel drive MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Have the vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar, or on a flatbed.

With tow truck: vehicles with ALL4 all- wheel drive

Do not have your vehicle with ALL4 all- wheel drive towed with the front or rear

axle raised individually; otherwise, the wheels may lock and the transfer case may be dam- aged.<

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Have the vehicle transported on a flatbed sur- face only.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

MOBILITY Giving and receiving assistance

240

Tow-starting Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi- ble; instead, jump-start the engine, page 236. Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is cold, vehicles with an automatic transmission cannot be tow- started at all.

1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, page 50.

3. Shift into 3rd gear.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch completely depressed and then slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately depress the clutch completely again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn- ing flashers.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Giving and receiving assistance MOBILITY

241 Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Find Me.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

NAVIGATION

Entertainment

COMMUNICATIONS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Technical data

244

Technical data

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described

that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

Engine data

MINI Countryman

Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works

Displacement cu in/ cm

97.5/ 1,598

97.5/ 1,598

97.5/ 1,598

Number of cylinders 4 4 4

Maximum power out- put

hp 121 181 208

At engine speed rpm 6,000 5,500 6,000

Maximum torque

with overboost

lb ft/Nm 114/155

177/240

192/260

207/280

221/300

At engine speed

with overboost

rpm 4,250

1,600-5,000

1,700-4,500

1,900-5,000

2,100-4,500

Overboost briefly raises the maximum torque at high rates of acceleration, e.g. when passing.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Technical data REFERENCE

245

MINI Paceman

Cooper Cooper S

Displacement cu in/ cm

97.5/ 1,598

97.5/ 1,598

Number of cylinders 4 4

Maximum power out- put

hp 121 181

At engine speed rpm 6,000 5,500

Maximum torque

with overboost

lb ft/Nm 118/160

177/240

192/260

At engine speed

with overboost

rpm 4,250

1,600-5,000

1,700-4,500

Overboost briefly raises the maximum torque at high rates of acceleration, e.g. when passing.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Technical data

246

Dimensions

MINI Countryman

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Technical data REFERENCE

247

Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works

1 Vehicle width, with outside mirror 78.5/1,995 78.5/1,995 78.6/1,996

2 Vehicle height without roof antenna

61.5/1,561 61.5/1,561 61.5/1,561

3 Vehicle width, without outside mirror

70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789

4 Wheelbase 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,596

5 Vehicle length 161.7/4,108 161.8/4,110 163.2/4,144

All dimensions in in/mm. Minimum turning radius dia.: 38.1 ft/11.6 m.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Technical data

248

MINI Paceman

Cooper Cooper S

1 Vehicle width, with outside mirror 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996

2 Vehicle height without roof antenna 59.8/1,518 59.9/1,522

3 Vehicle width, without outside mirror 70.3/1,786 70.3/1,786

4 Wheelbase 102.2/2,596 102.2/2,596

5 Vehicle length 162.2/4,120 162.2/4,120

All dimensions in in/mm. Minimum turning radius dia.: 38.1 ft/11.6 m.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Technical data REFERENCE

249

Weights

MINI Countryman

Cooper Cooper S

Curb weight, ready for travel, with all optional extras

> Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,954/1,340 3,053/1,385

> Automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,020/1,370 3,097/1,405

Approved gross weight

> Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,858/1,750 3,990/1,810

> Automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,924/1,780 4,034/1,830

Load lbs/kg 860/390 860/390

Approved front axle load

> Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,050/930 2,127/965

> Automatic transmission lbs/kg 2,116/960 2,172/985

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,918/870 1,918/870

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/ liters

12.4 - 41.3/ 350 - 1,170

12.4 - 41.3/ 350 - 1,170

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Technical data

250

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.

Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works

Curb weight, ready for travel, with all optional extras

> Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,208/1,455 3,263/1,480

> Automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,252/1,475 3,307/1,500

Approved gross weight

> Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,101/1,860 4,156/1,885

> Automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,145/1,880 4,200/1,905

Load lbs/kg 860/390 860/390

Approved front axle load

> Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,183/990 2,183/990

> Automatic transmission lbs/kg 2,227/1,010 2,227/1,010

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,017/915 2,072/940

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/ liters

12.4 - 41.3/ 350 - 1,170

12.4 - 41.3/ 350 - 1,170

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Technical data REFERENCE

251

MINI Paceman

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.

Capacities

Cooper Cooper S Cooper S ALL4

Curb weight, ready for travel, with all optional extras

> Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,940/1,334 3,070/1,393 3,210/1,456

> Automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,010/1,365 3,110/1,411 3,260/1,479

Approved gross weight

> Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,850/1,746 3,960/1,796 4,100/1,860

> Automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,920/1,778 4,010/1,819 4,140/1,878

Load lbs/kg 850/386 850/386 850/386

Approved front axle load

> Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,050/930 2,120/962 2,180/989

> Automatic transmission lbs/kg 2,120/962 2,170/984 2,220/1,007

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,910/866 1,910/866 2,020/916

Approved roof load capac- ity

lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/ liters

11.6 - 38.1/ 330 - 1080

11.6 - 38.1/ 330 - 1080

11.6 - 38.1/ 330 - 1080

US gal/US quarts Liters Notes

Fuel tank 12.4/ approx. 47 Fuel grade: page 201

including reserve of 2.1/ approx. 8

Window washer system incl. headlamp washer system /4.2 approx. 4 For more details: page 57

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Short commands for the voice activation system

252

Short commands for the voice activation system

Vehicle equipment In this chapter, all production, country, and optional equipment that is offered in the model range is described. Equipment is also described that is not available because of, for example, selected options or country version. This also applies to safety related functions and systems.

General information Instructions for the voice activation system, refer to page 21.

Having the possible spoken commands read aloud: {Voice commands}

The following short commands apply to vehicles with voice activation system. They do not work for equipment with which only the mobile phone can be operated by voice.

Useful short commands

Function Command

Accessing tone control {Tone}

Accessing settings {Settings}

Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}

Accessing contacts {Contacts}

To display phone book {Phonebook}

Accessing services {Assist}

Selecting destination entry {Enter address}

Selecting route guidance {Guidance}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE

253

CD/Multimedia

CD drive

External devices

Tone control

Function Command

Playing a CD {C D on}

Selecting a CD {Select C D}

Selecting a CD and track {C D track } e.g. CD 3 track 5

Selecting a track {C D track } e.g. track 5

Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}

CD {C D}

Function Command

Selecting external devices {External devices}

Function Command

Accessing tone control {Tone}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Short commands for the voice activation system

254

Radio

FM

AM

Satellite radio

Function Command

Selecting the radio {Radio}

Selecting FM stations {F M}

Selecting manual search {Manual}

Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}

Selecting a station {Select station} e.g. W-PLJ

Function Command

Selecting AM stations {A M}

Selecting manual search {Manual}

Function Command

Selecting the satellite radio {Satellite radio}

Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}

Selecting a satellite radio channel {Select satellite radio} e.g. channel 2

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE

255

Stored stations

Telephone

Office

Function Command

Selecting stored stations {Presets}

Choosing a stored station {Select preset}

Selecting a stored station {Preset } e.g. stored station 2

Function Command

Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}

To display phone book {Phonebook}

To redial {Redial}

Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}

Dialing a phone number {Dial number}

Displaying the list of messages {Messages}

Displaying Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}

Function Command

Calling up the Office menu {Office}

Displaying Current office {Current office}

Displaying contacts {Contacts}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Short commands for the voice activation system

256

Contacts

Navigation

General information

Displaying messages {Messages}

Displaying calendar {Calendar}

Displaying tasks {Tasks}

Displaying reminders {Reminders}

Function Command

Function Command

Accessing contacts {Contacts}

My contacts {My contacts}

New contact {New contact}

Function Command

Navigation menu {Navigation}

Selecting destination entry {Enter address}

Entering an address {Enter address}

Selecting route guidance {Guidance}

Starting route guidance {Start guidance}

Ending route guidance {Stop guidance}

Retrieving home address {Home address}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE

257

Map

Selecting route criteria {Route preference}

Selecting route {Route information}

Switching on the voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}

Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}

Switching off the voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}

Displaying the address book {Address book}

Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}

Accessing traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}

Special destinations {Points of interest}

Function Command

Function Command

Displaying the map {Map}

Map facing north {Map facing north}

Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}

Perspective map {Map perspective view}

Automatic scaling of the map {Map with automatic scaling}

Changing the scale {Map scale}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Short commands for the voice activation system

258

Route guidance with intermediate destinations

Vehicle information

Settings

Vehicle

Function Command

Entering a new destination {Enter address}

Function Command

Accessing the onboard computer {Onboard info}

Accessing the trip computer {Trip computer}

Accessing vehicle information {Vehicle info}

Accessing vehicle status {Vehicle status}

Function Command

Opening the main menu {Main menu}

Accessing settings {Settings}

Accessing options {Options}

Settings on the Control Display {Control display}

Accessing time and date settings {Time and date}

Accessing language and unit settings {Language and units}

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Short commands for the voice activation system REFERENCE

259

Accessing speed limit settings {Speed}

Activating lighting {Lighting}

Selecting the door lock {Door locks}

Function Command

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

260

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z

Index

A ABS Antilock Brake System 72 Accepting a call 167, 179 Accessories, see Vehicle

equipment 4 Acknowledgment signals for

locking/unlocking vehicle 28 Activated-charcoal filter for

automatic climate control 91 Adaptive Light Control 85 Adding engine oil 216 Additives coolant 217 engine oil 216 Address, entering 126 Address for navigation entering 120, 126 Adjusting temperature inside

the car, refer to Air conditioner 88

Adjusting temperature inside the car, refer to Automatic climate control 90

Adjusting the tone during audio operation, refer to Tone control 141

Airbags 81 sitting safely 38 warning lamp 83 Air conditioner 88 Air conditioning mode air conditioner 88 automatic climate control 90 ventilation 92 Air distribution automatic 90 individual 89 manual 89

Air flow rate 88, 90 air conditioning system 88 automatic climate control 90 heating, ventilation 88 Airing, refer to Ventilation 92 Air pressure, checking, refer to

Tire inflation pressure 203 Air recirculation, refer to

Recirculated-air mode 89, 90

Air supply air conditioner 88 automatic climate control 90 ventilation 92 AKI, refer to Fuel grade 201 Alarm system 32 ALL4 all-wheel drive system 74 All-season tires, refer to Winter

tires 213 All-wheel drive, refer to

ALL4 74 AM, waveband 143 Ambient air, refer to

Recirculated-air mode 89, 90

Ambient lighting 87 Antenna, care 220 Antifreeze coolant 217 washer fluid 57 Antilock Brake System ABS 72 Anti-theft alarm system, refer

to Alarm system 32 Approved axle loads, refer to

Weights 249 Approved engine oils 216 Approved gross vehicle

weight, refer to Weights 249 Armrest, refer to Center

armrest 97

Arrival time computer 62 route guidance 129 Ashtray 100 Assistant systems, refer to Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 72 Audio 140 controls 140 switching on/off 140 tone control 141 volume 141 Audio device, external 97 Automatic air distribution 90 air flow rate 90 cruise control 58 headlamp control 84 Automatic climate control 88 automatic air distribution 90 Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 52 Interlock 53 overriding selector lever

lock 54 Shiftlock 53 sport program 54 AUTO program for automatic

climate control 90 Auxiliary phone 176 AUX-In, refer to External audio

device 97 AUX-In connection 153 Average fuel consumption 61 setting the units 64 Average speed 62 Avoiding highways for

navigation 129 Axle loads, refer to

Weights 249

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

261

B Background lighting, refer to

Ambient lighting 87 Backrests, refer to Seats 39 Backup lamps replacing bulb 228 Band-aids, refer to First aid

pouch 236 Bar, refer to Tow-starting,

towing away 239 Base plate for telephone or

mobile phone refer to Snap-in adapter 185 Bass sounds, refer to Tone

control 141 Battery 233 disposal 35, 234 jump-starting 236 temporary power failure 234 Battery renewal remote control 35 Being towed 238 Belts, refer to Safety belts 42 Belt tensioner, refer to Safety

belts 42 Beverage holders, refer to

Cupholders 100 Black ice, refer to External

temperature warning 61 Blower, refer to Air flow

rate 88, 90 Bluetooth, activating/

deactivating 165, 175 Bluetooth audio 157 device pairing 158 disconnecting an audio

connection 160 playback 159 unpairing device 160 what to do if... 160 Bottle holders, refer to

Cupholders 100 Brake Assist 72 Brake fluid, refer to Service

requirements 64

Brake lamps replacing bulbs 228 Brake pads, breaking in 104 Brake rotors 106 brakes 104 breaking in 104 Brakes ABS 72 breaking in 104 MINI Maintenance

System 218 parking brake 52 service requirements 64 Brakes, refer to Braking

safely 105 Brake system 104 breaking in 104 disc brakes 106 MINI Maintenance

System 218 Breakdown service, refer to

Roadside Assistance 236 Breaking in the clutch 104 Break-in period 104 Brightness of Control

Display 70 Bulb changing, refer to Lamps

and bulbs 224 Button for starting the

engine 50 Buttons on the steering

wheel 11

C Calendar 191 displaying appointment 191 selecting calendar day 191 California Proposition 65

warning 5 Call ending 168, 180 muting the microphone 181 Calling, refer to Phone

numbers, dialing 168, 180 Can holders, refer to

Cupholders 100

Capacities 251 Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 233 Car care 220 Care 220 car-care products 220 car washes 220 CD/DVD drives 223 high-pressure washers 221 leather 222 manual washing 221 upholstery and fabrics 222 windows 221 wiper blades 221 Cargo, securing 112 Cargo area 106 capacity 249 Comfort Access 34 lamp 87 opening from outside 31 trunk lid, refer to Tailgate 31 Cargo area, expanding 106 Cargo area lamp 87 Cargo area lid, refer to

Tailgate 31 Cargo area partition net, refer

to Cargo net 109 Cargo loading 110 securing cargo 112 stowing cargo 111 vehicle 106 Cargo net 109 Car key, refer to Keys/remote

controls 26 Carpets, care 222 Car phone installation location, refer to

Center armrest 97 Car phone, refer to

Telephone 164, 174 Car radio, refer to Radio 143 Car wash before driving in 52 Car wash, care 220 Car washes 220 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 105

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

262

CD, audio playback 151 CD player 151 controls 140 fast forward/reverse 152 random order 152 selecting a track 151 switching on/off 140 tone control 141 volume 141 Center armrest 97 Center brake lamp 229 Center console, refer to

Around the center console 14

Center Rail 99 Center Rail, refer to Storage

compartments 98 Central locking system 27 Comfort Access 33 from inside 30 from outside 27 setting unlocking

behavior 27 Changing bulbs 224 Changing the language on the

Control Display 69 Changing the measurement

units on the Control Display 64

Changing wheels 232 Charging the battery 234 Chassis number, refer to

Engine compartment 214 Check Control 67 Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 47 Child restraint systems 46 Child-safety locks 49 Child seats 46 Chrome parts, care 222 Chrome parts, refer to

Care 220 Cigarette lighter 100 Cleaning headlamps 57 washer fluid 57

Clock setting time 66 12 h/24 h mode 66 Closing from inside 30 from outside 27 Clothes hooks 100 Cockpit 10 Cold start, refer to Starting the

engine 51 Comfort Access 33 replacing the battery 35 what to observe before

entering a car wash 34 Comfort area, refer to Around

the center console 14 Compartment for remote

control, refer to Ignition lock 50

Compass 95 Computer 61 displays on Control

Display 62 Condensation, refer to When

the vehicle is parked 106 Condition Based Service

CBS 218 Configuring settings, refer to

Personal Profile 26 Connecting vacuum cleaner,

refer to Connecting electrical appliances 101

Consumption, refer to Average fuel consumption 61

Contacts 171, 188 new contact 189 Continuing route

guidance 129 Control Display adjusting brightness 70 Control Display, refer to iDrive switching on/off 16 Control Display, refer to

Onboard computer 16 adjusting brightness 70 Controls and displays 10

Control stick, refer to Onboard computer 16

Control unit, refer to Onboard computer 16

Convenience operation windows 28 Convenient access, refer to

Comfort Access 33 Convenient start, refer to

Starting the engine 51 Coolant 217 checking level 217 filling 217 temperature 217 Cooling, maximum 91 Cooling fluid, refer to

Coolant 217 Copyright 2 Cornering light, refer to

Adaptive Light Control 85 Criteria for route 129 Cruise control indicator lamp 13 Cruising range 61 Cupholders 100 Curb weight, refer to

Weights 249 Current fuel consumption 62 Current playback external devices 156

D

Dashboard, refer to Cockpit 10 Dashboard instruments, refer

to Displays 12 Dashboard lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 86 Data 244 capacities 251 dimensions 246 engine 244 weights 249 Date setting 67 setting format 67 Daytime running lights 85

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

263

DBC Dynamic Brake Control, refer to Brake Assist 72

Deactivating front passenger airbags 82

Deadlocking, refer to Locking 28

Defect door lock 29 Defective fuel filler flap 200 Defining a home address 189 Defogging windows 89, 91 Defrosting windows 89, 91 Defrosting windows and

removing condensation air conditioner 89 automatic climate control 91 Defrosting windshield, refer to

Defrosting windows 89, 91 Defrost position, refer to

Defrosting windows 89, 91 Deleting contacts 173, 190 Destination address entering 120, 126 Destination for navigation entering 120 entering via map 125 Differential, breaking in 104 Digital compass 95 Digital radio, refer to HD

Radio 144 Dimensions 246 Dipstick, engine oil 215 Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 55 Direction announcements,

refer to Voice instructions 133

Direction instructions, refer to Voice instructions 133

Directory for navigation, refer to Address book 122

Displacement, refer to Engine data 244

Display, refer to Onboard computer controls 16

Displaying contact pictures 190

Displaying contacts 172 Displaying special

destinations 125 Display lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 86 Displays 12 instrument combination 12 on the Control Display 16 Displays, care 223 Displays and controls 10 Disposal of coolant 217 remote control battery 35 vehicle battery 234 Distance, refer to Computer 62 Distance remaining to service,

refer to Service requirements 64

Distance to destination, refer to Computer 62

Distance warning, refer to Park Distance Control PDC 71

Door key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 26

Door lock 29 Door lock, confirmation

signals 28 Doors, manual operation 29 DOT Quality Grades 210 Drinks holders, refer to

Cupholders 100 Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill

Assist 74 Driving dynamics control, refer

to Sport button 74 Driving lamps, refer to Parking

lamps/low beams 84 Driving notes 104 Driving off on inclines, refer to

Hill Assist 74 Driving stability control

systems 72 Driving through water 105 Driving tips, refer to Driving

notes 104

Dry air, refer to Cooling function 91

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 72

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 73

Dynamic Brake Control DBC, refer to Brake Assist 72

Dynamic route guidance 136 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 72 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 73

E Editing a contact 172 Eject button, refer to Buttons

on the CD player 140 Electrical malfunction door lock 29 fuel filler flap 200 Electronic brake-force

distribution 72 Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 72

E-mail 191 Emergency operation, refer to

Manual operation door lock 29 fuel filler flap 200 transmission lock, automatic

transmission 54 Emergency services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 236 Ending a call 168, 180 Engine breaking in 104 data 244 overheated, refer to Coolant

temperature 217 speed 244 starting, Comfort Access 33 Engine compartment 214 Engine coolant, refer to

Coolant 217

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

264

Engine malfunction indicator lamp 13 Engine oil additives, refer to Approved

engine oils 216 alternative oil types 216 approved engine oils 216 capacity 216 checking level 215 dipstick 215 intervals between changes,

refer to Service requirements 64

MINI Maintenance System 218

Engine oil level, checking 215 Engine output, refer to Engine

data 244 Engine starting, refer to

Starting the engine 51 Entering destination 120 Entering intersection 121 Entertainment sound output

on/off 140 Entry map for destination 125 ESP Electronic Stability

Program, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 72

Exhaust system, refer to Hot exhaust system 105

Exterior mirrors 44 adjusting 44 automatic dimming

feature 45 automatic heating 45 folding in and out 44 External audio device 97 External audio device, refer to

AUX-In connection 153 External care 220 External devices random play sequence 156 Software update 161 External temperature display change units of measure 64 in the onboard computer 64

External temperature warning 61

Eyes for tow-starting and towing

away 238 for tying down loads 112

F Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 67 Failure of an electrical

consumer 234 Fastening safety belts, refer to

Safety belts 42 Fastest route for

navigation 129 Fast forward CD player 152 Fault messages, refer to Check

Control 67 Faulty tire 76 Filter microfilter/activated-

charcoal filter for automatic climate control 91

microfilter for air conditioner 89

Fine wood, care 223 First aid pouch 236 Fixture for remote control,

refer to Ignition lock 50 Flash when locking/

unlocking 28 Flat load floor 109 Flat tire run-flat tires 212 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 77 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 75 indicating a flat tire 76 initializing the system 75 snow chains 75 system limits 75 Flat tires, refer to Tire

condition 211 Floor mats, care 222

Floor plate, refer to Flat load floor 109

FM, waveband 143 Fog lamps replacing bulb 226 Folding rear seat backrest 106 Footbrake, refer to Braking

safely 105 Footwell lamps 87 For your own safety 4 Four-wheel drive, refer to

ALL4 74 Front airbags 81 Front fog lamps 86 replacing bulb 226 Front seat adjustment 39 Frost on windows, refer to

Defrosting windows 89, 91 FTM, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 75 Fuel 201 gauge 60 high-quality brands 201 quality 201 specifications 201 tank capacity 251 Fuel clock, refer to Fuel

gauge 60 Fuel consumption display average fuel consumption 61 Fuel display, refer to Fuel

gauge 60 Fuel filler flap 200 releasing in the event of

electrical malfunction 200 Fuses 234

G

Garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 93

Gasoline refer to Average fuel

consumption 61 Gasoline, refer to Required

fuel 201

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

265

Gasoline display, refer to Fuel gauge 60

Gear indicator automatic transmission with

Steptronic 53 Gear shifting automatic transmission 53 manual transmission 52 Gearshift lever automatic transmission with

Steptronic 53 manual transmission 52 General driving notes 104 Glass roof, electric 35 convenience operation 28 opening, closing 35 remote control 28 tilting 35 Glove compartment 97 GPS navigation, refer to

Navigation system 118 Gross vehicle weight, refer to

Weights 249

H Halogen lamps replacing bulb 225 Handbrake, refer to Parking

brake 52 Hands-free device

Bluetooth 164 Hands-free

system 14, 171, 183 Hazard warning flashers 14 HD Radio 144 Head airbags 81 Headlamp control,

automatic 84 Headlamp flasher 55 indicator lamp 11, 13, 88, 91 Headlamp glass lens 225 Headlamps replacing bulb 225 Headlamps, care 221 Head Light, refer to Adaptive

Light Control 85

Head restraints 41 sitting safely 38 Heated mirrors 45 rear window 89, 91 seats 42 Heating mirrors 45 rear window 89, 91 seats 42 Heavy loads, refer to Stowing

cargo 111 Height, refer to

Dimensions 246 Height adjustment seats 39 steering wheel 45 High beams 86 headlamp flasher 86 indicator lamp 13, 88, 91 replacing bulb 225 High water, refer to Driving

through water 105 Highway, refer to Route

criteria 129 Hill Assist 74 Hills 106 Holders for cups 100 Homepage 4 Hood 215 Horn 10 Hot exhaust system 105 Hydroplaning 105

I

IBOC, refer to HD Radio 144 Ice warning, refer to External

temperature warning 61 Ignition 50 switched off 51 switched on 50 Ignition key, refer to

Integrated key/remote control 26

Ignition key position 1, refer to Radio readiness 50

Ignition key position 2, refer to Ignition on 50

Ignition lock 50 Imprint 2 Incoming call 167, 179 Indicator and warning

lamps 13 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 78 Indicator lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 86 Individual air distribution 89 Individual settings, refer to

Personal Profile 26 Inflation pressure monitoring,

refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 77

Information on another location 124 on current position 124 on destination location 124 Initializing Flat Tire Monitor FTM 75 glass roof, electric 36 radio, refer to Station,

storing 144 Initializing the compass, see Calibration 96 Instructions for navigation

system, refer to Voice instructions 133

Instrument lighting 86 Instrument panel, refer to

Cockpit 10 Instrument panel, refer to

Displays 12 Integrated key 26 Integrated universal remote

control 93 Interactive map 126 Interesting destination for

navigation 124 Interior lamps 87 remote control 28 Interior rearview mirror 45 automatic dimming

feature 45 Interlock 53

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

266

Intermittent mode of the wipers 56

Internal care 222 Internet page 4

J

Jacking points 232 Jets, refer to Window washer

nozzles 57 Joystick, refer to Onboard

computer 16 Jumpering, refer to Jump-

starting 236 Jump-starting 236

K Key, refer to Keys/remote

controls 26 Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort

Access 33 Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort Access 33 Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 26 Keypad dialing 169, 181 Kickdown 53 automatic transmission with

Steptronic 53 Knock control 201

L Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/

Low beams 84 Lamps and bulbs, replacing

bulbs 224 Lashing eyes, refer to Securing

cargo 112 Last destinations 123 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 47 Leather care 222 LEDs light-emitting diodes 225 Length, refer to

Dimensions 246

License plate lamp bulb replacement 229 Light automatic headlamp

control 84 Light alloy wheels, care 222 Light-emitting diodes

LEDs 225 Lighter 100 socket 101 Lighting lamps and bulbs 224 of the instruments 86 of vehicle, refer to Lamps 84 Light switch 84 Limit, refer to Speed limit 69 Load 110 Load securing equipment,

refer to Securing cargo 112 Lock buttons of doors, refer to

Locking 30 Locking adjusting confirmation

signal 28 from inside 30 from outside 28 without remote control, refer

to Comfort Access 33 Locking and unlocking doors confirmation signals 28 from inside 30 from outside 27 Longlife oils approved motor oils 216 Low beams 84 automatic 84 replacing bulb 225 Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 40 Luggage compartment doors, refer to Tailgate 31 Luggage compartment

partition net, refer to Cargo net 109

Luggage rack, refer to Roof- mounted luggage rack 112

Lumbar support 40

M M+S tires, refer to Winter

tires 213 Main menu 17 Maintenance, refer to Service

and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

Maintenance system 218 Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 67 Manual air distribution 89 Manual mode automatic transmission with

Steptronic 54 Manual operation door lock 29 fuel filler flap 200 transmission lock, automatic

transmission 54 Manual transmission 52 Manual washing 221 Map changing scale 132 Map for navigation entering destination 125 Master key, refer to Integrated

key/remote control 26 Maximum cooling 91 Maximum speed with winter tires 213 Medical assistance, refer to

First aid pouch 236 MENU button 16 Menus, refer to Onboard

computer 16 Messages 190 Microfilter for air conditioner 89 for automatic climate

control 91 MINI Maintenance

System 218

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

267

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

MINI Maintenance System 218

Microphone for telephone 14 MINI Connected 195 MINI Internet page 4 MINI joystick, refer to Onboard

computer 16 MINI Maintenance System 218 Mirror dimming feature 45 Mirrors 44 exterior mirrors 44 heating 45 interior rearview mirror 45 Mobile phone adjusting volume 167, 179 connecting, refer to Mobile

phone, pairing 164, 175 installation location, refer to

Center armrest 97 pairing 164, 175 what to do if. 166, 178 Mobile phone, installation

location, refer to Center armrest 97

Mobile phone preparation Bluetooth 174

Mobility Kit 230 Modifications, technical, refer

to For your own safety 4 Monitor, refer to MINI controls

with navigation 16 Monitoring system for tire

pressures, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 75

Multifunctional steering wheel, refer to Buttons on the steering wheel 11

Multifunction switch refer to Turn signals/

headlamp flasher 55 refer to Wiper system 55

N Navigation storing current position 122 Navigation data 118 Navigation destination entering manually 120, 126 home address 123 Navigation instructions, refer

to Switching voice instructions on/off 133

Navigation system 118 address book 122 bypassing a route

section 130 continuing route

guidance 129 destination entry 120 dynamic route guidance 136 entering a destination

manually 120, 126 planning a trip 127 route list 130 selecting destination via

map 125 selecting route criteria 129 special destinations 124 starting route guidance 129 terminating route

guidance 129 voice instructions 133 volume adjustment 133 Neck support, refer to Head

restraints 41 Nets, refer to Storage

compartments 98 New tires 212 North-facing map 131 Notes 192 Number of cylinders, refer to

Engine data 244 Number of safety belts 38 Nylon rope, refer to Tow

rope 239

O OBD socket, refer to Socket for

On-Board Diagnosis 219 Octane ratings, refer to Fuel

specifications 201 Odometer 61 Office 187 current office 187 what to do if. 193 Oil, refer to Engine oil 215 Oil consumption 215 Oil level 215 Oil types 216 Old batteries, refer to

Disposal 234 Onboard computer 16 changing language 69 menu guidance 17 operating principles 16 overview 16 status information 19 Opening and closing Comfort Access 33 from inside 30 from outside 27 using the door lock 29 using the remote control 27 Opening and unlocking from inside 30 Options, selecting for

navigation 129 Orientation menu, refer to

Main menu 17 Outlets refer to Ventilation 92 Output, refer to Engine

data 244 Outside-air mode automatic climate control 90 Overheated engine, refer to

Coolant temperature 217

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

268

P Paintwork, care 221 Park Distance Control PDC 71 Parking vehicle 51 Parking aid, refer to Park

Distance Control PDC 71 Parking brake 52 indicator lamp 13 Parking lamps, replacing

bulb 226 Parking lamps/low beams 84 Parts and accessories, see

Vehicle equipment 4 Pathway lighting 85 Personal Profile 26 Phone numbers dialing 168, 180 Pinch protection system windows 37 Plastic parts, care 223 Pollen refer to Microfilter/activated-

charcoal filter for automatic climate control 91

refer to Microfilter for air conditioner 89

Power failure 234 Power window safety switch 37 Power windows 36 Power windows, refer to

Windows 36 Pressure, tires 203 Pressure monitoring, tires 75 Flat Tire Monitor 75 Pressure monitoring of tires,

refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 77

Protective function, refer to Pinch protection system

windows 37 Puncture Flat Tire Monitor 75

R Radio controls 140 HD Radio 144 satellite radio 145 storing stations 144 tone control 141 volume 141 waveband, selecting 143 Radio key, refer to Integrated

key/remote control 26 Radio position, refer to Radio

readiness 50 Radio readiness 50 switched off 51 switched on 50 Rain sensor 56 Random play sequence external devices 156 Range, refer to Cruising

range 61 Reading aloud 193 Reading lamps 87 Rear lamps bulb replacement 228 Rear lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 228 Rear-mounted luggage

rack 113 Rear seat backrest, folding 106 Rear seats adjusting 40 folding down the

backrests 106 Rearview mirror compass 95 Rearview mirror, refer to

Mirrors 44 Rear window windshield wiper 57 Rear window defroster 89, 91 Rear window safety switch 37 Reception quality 144 radio station 144

Recirculated-air mode 89, 90 Recirculation of air, refer to

Recirculated-air mode 89, 90

Reclining seat, refer to Backrest 39

Refueling 200 Rejecting a call 168, 180 Releasing hood 215 Reminders 192 Remote control 26 battery renewal 35 Comfort Access 33 garage door opener 93 malfunctions 29, 34 service data 218 tailgate 28 Replacement remote

control 26 Replacing bulbs, refer to

Lamps and bulbs 224 Replacing tires, refer to New

wheels and tires 212 Reporting safety defects 7 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 60 Reservoir for washer

systems 57 Reset, refer to Resetting tone

settings 142 Restraint systems for children 46 refer to Safety belts 42 Reverse CD player 152 Reverse gear automatic transmission with

Steptronic 53 manual transmission 52 Road map 131 Roadside Assistance 236 Roadside parking lamps 86 replacing bulb 226 Road worthiness test, refer to

Service requirements 64

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

269

Roof load capacity 249 Roof-mounted luggage

rack 112 Rope, refer to Tow-starting,

towing away 239 Route 129, 130 bypassing sections 130 changing 129, 130 changing criteria 129 displaying arrow view 130 displaying map view 131 displaying streets or towns/

cities 130 selecting 129 Route guidance 129 bypassing a route

section 130 changing specified route 129 distance and arrival 129 voice instructions 133 volume of voice

instructions 133 Route section, changing 130 Route selection 129 RSC Run-flat System

Component, refer to Run-flat tires 212

Rubber parts, care 222 Run-flat System Component

RSC, refer to Run-flat tires 212

Run-flat tires 212 flat tire 76 Flat Tire Monitor 76 tire inflation pressure 203 tire replacement 212 winter tires 213

S Safety belt number 38 Safety Belt Reminder 44

Safety belts 42 center belt 43 damage 44 indicator lamp 44 reminder 44 sitting safely 38 Safety belts, care 223 Safety systems airbags 81 Antilock Brake System

ABS 72 driving stability control

systems 72 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 72 safety belts 42 Safety tires, refer to Run-flat

tires 212 Satellite radio 145 channel, activating or

deactivating 146 channel, selecting 146 channel, storing 147 favorites 148 time shift 147 Traffic Jump 149 Screen, refer to Onboard

computer controls 16 Screw thread for tow

fitting 238 SDARS, refer to Satellite

radio 145 Seat adjustment mechanical 39 rear 40 Seats 39 adjusting the seats 39 heating 42 sitting safely 38 Securing the vehicle from inside 30 from outside 27 Selecting navigation

system 118 Selecting new scale for

navigation 132

Selector lever automatic transmission with

Steptronic 53 Selector lever lock automatic transmission with

Steptronic, refer to Shiftlock 53

overriding manually 54 Selector lever positions automatic transmission with

Steptronic 53 Service, refer to Roadside

Assistance 236 Service car, refer to Roadside

Assistance 236 Service data in the remote

control 218 Service Interval Display, refer

to Condition Based Service CBS 218

Service requirement display, refer to Condition Based Service CBS 218

Service requirements 64 Settings clock, 12 h/24 h mode 66 date format 67 language 69 Settings and information 62 Setting time and date 66 Setting time zone, time, and

date 66 Shifting gears automatic transmission with

Steptronic 54 manual transmission 52 Shiftlock automatic transmission, refer

to Changing selector lever positions 53

Shift paddles 54 Short commands for the voice

activation system 252 Short route in navigation, refer

to Selecting route 129

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

270

Shuffled, refer to Random CD player 152 Side airbags 81 Side marker lamps, replacing

bulbs 227 Side turn signal replacing bulb 227 Side windows, refer to

Windows 36 Signal horn, refer to Horn 10 Sitting safely 38 airbags 38 safety belts 38 with head restraint 38 Size, refer to Dimensions 246 Sliding/tilt sunroof refer to Glass roof, electric 35 Slot for remote control 50 Smokers' package, refer to

Ashtray 100 Snap-in adapter inserting/removing 185 use 174 Snap-in adapter, refer to

Center armrest storage compartment 97

Snow chains 213 Socket, refer to Connecting

electrical appliances 101 Socket for On-Board Diagnosis

OBD 219 Software update 161 Speaking, refer to Voice

instructions from navigation system 133

Special destinations 124 Special oils, refer to Approved

engine oils 216 Speed 244 with winter tires 213 Speed limit 69 setting 69 Speed limit warning, refer to

Speed limit 69

Speedo, refer to Speedometer 12

Speedometer 12 Speed volume 141 Split rear seat backrest, refer to

Expanding the cargo area 106

Sport button 74 Stability control, refer to

Driving stability control systems 72

Start/Stop button 50 starting the engine 51 switching off the engine 51 Starting, refer to Starting the

engine 51 Starting assistance, refer to

Jump-starting 236 Starting route guidance 129 Starting the engine 51 Start/Stop button 50 Start-off assistance, refer to DSC 72 Hill Assist 74 State/province, for

navigation 120 Station, selecting radio 143 Status information on the

Control Display 19 Status of this Owner's Manual

at time of printing 4 Steering wheel 45 adjustment 45 buttons on steering wheel 11 lock 50 shift paddles 54 Steptronic, refer to Automatic

transmission with Steptronic 52

Storage area cargo area 106 Storage compartments 98 Storage space storage compartments 98

Storing a destination in the address book 122

Storing the vehicle 223 Storing tires 213 Stowage, refer to Storage

compartments 98 Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 203 SW, waveband 143 Switches, refer to Cockpit 10 Switching off engine 51 Switching off the engine 51 Start/Stop button 50 Switching on audio 140 CD player 140 radio 140 Switching radio on/off 140 Switching the cooling function

on and off 91 Symbols 4 status information 19

T Tachometer 60 Tailgate 31 Comfort Access 34 opening/closing 31 opening from outside 31 unlocking with remote

control 28 Tail lamp, refer to Tail

lamps 228 replacing bulb 228 Tail lamps 228 Tank volume, refer to

Capacities 251 Target cursor for

navigation 125 Tasks 192 Technical data 244 Technical modifications 4

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

271

Telephone hands-free system 171, 183 installation location, refer to

Center armrest 97 voice commands 183 Telephone receiving power,

refer to Status information 19

Temperature display setting the units 64 Temperature of coolant, refer

to Coolant temperature 217 Temperature setting air conditioner 89 automatic climate control 91 Tempomat, refer to Cruise

control 58 Tensioning straps, refer to

Securing cargo 112 Text message 190 Third brake lamp, refer to

Center brake lamp 229 Three-point safety belt 42 Tightening the lug bolts torque 233, 234 Tightening torque, refer to

Tightening lug bolts 233 Tire failure Flat Tire Monitor 76 indicator/warning lamp 76 MINI Mobility Kit 230 run-flat tires 76 Tire Pressure Monitor 77 Tire inflation pressure 203 loss 76, 77 Tire pressure monitoring, refer

to Flat Tire Monitor 75 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 77 limitations of system 77 resetting system 78 warning lamp 78 Tire Quality Grading 210

Tires age 212 breaking in 104 changing, refer to Changing

wheels 232 condition 211 damage 211 inflation pressure 203 inflation pressure loss 78 minimum tread depth 211 new tires 212 pressure monitoring, refer to

Flat Tire Monitor 75 pressure monitoring, refer to

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 77

puncture 76 size 210 wear indicators, refer to

Minimum tread depth 211 winter tires 213 with emergency operation

properties 212 Tires with emergency

operation properties, refer to Run-flat tires 212

Tires with safety features, refer to Run-flat tires 212

TMC station, refer to Traffic information 133

Tone middle setting 142 Tone during audio playback adjusting 141 Torque 244 lug bolts 233 Tow bar 239 Tow fitting 238 screw thread 238 Tow fittings for tow-starting

and towing away 238 Towing 237 car with automatic

transmission 238 methods 239

Tow rope 239 Tow-starting 237 TPM, refer to Tire Pressure

Monitor 77 Track selecting on CD 151 Track width, refer to

Dimension 246 Traction control, refer to Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 72 Traffic bulletins categories 135 Traffic bulletins, filtering 135 Traffic congestion displaying traffic

information 133 refer to Route, bypassing

segments 130 Traffic information for

navigation displaying 134 Traffic information in

navigation screen display in the map

view 135 Transmission automatic transmission with

Steptronic 52 manual transmission 52 overriding selector lever lock

for automatic transmission with Steptronic 54

Transporting children safely 46 Transport securing devices,

refer to Securing cargo 112 Tread depth, refer to Minimum

tire tread 211 Treble, refer to Tone

control 141 Trip computer 62 Trip-distance counter, refer to

Trip odometer 61 Triple turn signal activation 55 Trip odometer 61

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

REFERENCE Everything from A to Z

272

Turning circle, refer to Dimensions 246

Turn signal front, replacing bulb 226 indicator lamp 12, 13 rear, replacing bulb 228 side, replacing bulb 227 Turn signals 55 Tying down loads, refer to

Cargo loading 112

U

Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQR 210

Units average fuel consumption 64 temperature 64 Universal garage door opener,

refer to Integrated universal remote control 93

Universal remote control 93 Unlatching, refer to

Unlocking 33 Unlocking from inside 30 from outside 27 setting unlocking

behavior 27 tailgate 34 without remote control, refer

to Comfort Access 33 Updating the navigation

data 118 Upholstery, care 222 USB audio interface 154 USB interface 97 Using contact data 193

V Vehicle battery 233 breaking in 104 cargo loading 106 dimensions 246 identification number, refer

to Engine compartment 214 parking 51 storage 223 weight 249 Vehicle jack jacking points 232 Ventilation air conditioner 92 Ventilation, refer to Climate

control 88 Vents, refer to Ventilation 92 Voice commands overview 21 short commands 252 telephone 183 Voice instructions for

navigation system 133 repeating 133 switching on/off 133 volume 133 Voice phone book 184 Volume 140 audio sources 140 mobile phone 167, 179 voice instructions 133 Volume balance, tone

setting 141 Volume of cargo area 249

W

Warning and indicator lamps 13

Warning messages, refer to Check Control 67

Warning triangle 236 Washer/wiper system washer fluid 57

Washer fluid 57 capacity of reservoir 58 Washer fluid reservoir 57 Waste tray, refer to

Ashtray 100 Waterfall lighting, refer to

Ambient lighting 87 Water on roads, refer to

Driving through water 105 Waveband for radio 143 Wear indicators in tires, refer to

Minimum tread depth 211 Weights 249 Welcome lamps 85 Wheelbase, refer to

Dimensions 246 Wheels, new 212 Wheels and tires 203 Width, refer to

Dimensions 246 Windows 36 closing 36 convenience operation 28 opening 36 pinch protection system 37 safety switch 37 Windows, indicator on Control

Display 16 Window washer, refer to

Washer fluid 57 Window washer reservoir,

refer to Washer fluid volume, refer to

Capacities 251 Window washer system 55 washer fluid 57 washer jets 57 Windshield cleaning 57 defrosting and removing

condensation 89, 91 Windshield wiper blades,

changing 224 Windshield wipers, refer to

Wiper system 55

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Everything from A to Z REFERENCE

273

Winter tires 213 setting speed limit 69 storage 213 Wiper blade replacement 224 Wiper system 55 Word matching principle for

navigation 128 Work in the engine

compartment 215

X Xenon lamps replacing bulb 225

Online Edition for Part no. 01402917368 - 10/12 BMW AG

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Paceman Mini works, you can view and download the Mini Paceman 2013 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Mini Paceman as well as other Mini manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mini Paceman. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mini Paceman 2013 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mini Paceman 2013 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mini Paceman 2013 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mini Paceman 2013 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mini Paceman 2013 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.